2009-GrandCherokee-2nd

7/29/2019 2009-GrandCherokee-2nd

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2009-grandcherokee-2nd 1/520

GRAND CHEROKEE 2009 owner’s ma

Ofrecido por www.electromanuales.com

http://www.electromanuales.com/




VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the nameChrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and thename Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOLDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you aredrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinkingdriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Yourperceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,and your judgment is impaired when you have beendrinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and features and equipment thattional on this vehicle. This m

description of features and eqavailable or were not orderdisregard any features and eqmanual that are not on this v

Chrysler LLC reserves the design and specifications, animprovements to its producobligation upon itself to insta

ously manufactured.

Copyright © 2008 Chrysler







TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .













INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Ⅵ Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Ⅵ Warnings And Cautions .

Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Num

Ⅵ Vehicle Modifications/Alte







INTRODUCTIONThis is a specialized utility vehicle designed for bothon-road and off-road use. It can go places and performtasks for which conventional two-wheel drive enclosedvehicles were not intended. It handles and maneuversdifferently from many passenger cars both on-road andoff-road, so take time to become familiar with yourvehicle.

The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed foron-road use only. It is not intended for off-road drivingor use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheeldrive vehicle.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’sManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis-sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehiclehandles on different road surfaces. Your driving skillswill improve with experience. When driving off-road or

working the vehicle, don’t ovethe vehicle to overcome theAlways observe federal, statewherever you drive.

As with other vehicles of this vehicle correctly may resultaccident. Refer to “On-Road/Section 5 of this manual.

This manual has been prepaservice and engineering specithe operation and maintenansupplemented by a Warranty

various customer-oriented doread these publications carefutions and recommendations assure safe and enjoyable ope

4 INTRODUCTION







NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored inthe vehicle for convenient reference and remain with thevehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorizeddealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trainedtechnicians and genuine MOPAR parts, and is inter-ested in your satisfaction.

ROLLOVER WARNINGUtility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higherground clearance and a higher center of gravity than

many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better ina wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in anunsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Becauseof the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles maynot.

Do not attempt sharp turns, aunsafe driving actions that control. Failure to operate thiin an accident, rollover of the injury. Drive carefully.

Rollover Warn







Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts providedis a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.government notes that the universal use of existing seat

belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or moreeach year and could reduce disabling injuries by two

million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than a person wearinga seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAConsult the Table of Contents contains the information you

The detailed index at the bac

contains a complete listing ofConsult the following table symbols that may be used on ythis Owner’s Manual:

6 INTRODUCTION


Of id l l








Of id l l







WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in an accident or

bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you

do not read this entire manual, you may miss importantinformation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on alabel located on the left front corner of the instrumentpanel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through thewindshield. This number also appears on the Automobile

Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window onyour vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip-ment.

NOTE: It is illegal to remove

VIN Loc

8 INTRODUCTION


Of id l t l







VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety andmay lead to an accident resulting in serious injury ordeath.


Of id l t l








Ofrecido por electroman ales com







THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOU

CONTENTS

Ⅵ A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ Integrated Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Ⅵ Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Ⅵ Vehicle Security Alarm . .

▫ Rearming The System .

▫ To Set The Alarm . . . .

▫ To Disarm The System

Ⅵ Illuminated Entry . . . . .

Ⅵ Remote Keyless Entry . .

▫ To Unlock The Doors .

▫ To Lock The Doors . . .

▫ To Release The Liftgate F


Ofrecido por www electromanuales com







▫ Express Down Window Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25

▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Ⅵ Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Ⅵ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Ⅵ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

▫ Power Windows . . . . .

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . .

Ⅵ Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫Liftgate Flipper Glass .

Ⅵ Occupant Restraints . . . .

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . .

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Opera

▫ Adjustable Upper Should

▫ Automatic Locking Mode

▫ Energy Management Fea

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use R(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . .

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE









▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 45

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

▫ Driver And Front Passenger SupplementalRestraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Ⅵ Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 68

Ⅵ Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

▫ Transporting Passengers

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . .

▫ Safety Checks You ShoulVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Periodic Safety Checks YOutside The Vehicle . .

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE S









A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This systemconsists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterwith integrated ignition key and a Wireless IgnitionNode (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert

the double-sided key into the ignition switch with eitherside up.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to anignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detentedpositions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START positionis a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When

released from the START position, the switch automati-cally returns to the detented ON position.

Wireless Ignition

1 — LOCK2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON4 — START










Integrated Ignition KeyThe integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch.It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-mitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the RKEtransmitter.

The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. Thevalet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keepthe valet key with you when valet parking.

To remove the valet key from the RKE transmitter, slidethe mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmittersideways with your thumb and then pull the key out

with your other hand. NOTE: You can insert the dthe lock cylinders with either

Ignition Key RemovalPlace the shift lever in PARK. TLOCK position, and remove t

Three-Button FOBIK (FOB










NOTE:• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift

lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily inthe ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key to theright slightly, then remove the key as described. If a

malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in theignition switch to warn you that this safety feature isinoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, butthe key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), the power windowswitches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), andpower outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes

after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.The time for this feature is programmable. For details,refer to “Key Off Power Delay,” under “Personal

Settings (Customer-Progra“Electronic Vehicle InformSection 4 of this manual.

WARN

Never leave children alonunattended children in a venumber of reasons. A childously or fatally injured. Doignition. A child could oother controls, or move the

CAUTIAn unlocked car is an invitremove key from the igniwhen leaving the vehicle un










Key-In-Ignition ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the integrated ignitionkey in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you toremove the key.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only soundswhen the integrated ignition key is placed in the LOCKor ACC position.

SENTRY KEYThe Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho-rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. Thesystem does not need to be armed or activated. Operationis automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni-tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system will seconds if an invalid RKE tranengine.

After turning the ignition swi

Vehicle Security Light will tur bulb check. If the light remainindicates that there is a probladdition, if the light begins toit indicates that someone usedto start the engine. Either of ththe engine being shut off afte

If the Vehicle Security Light

vehicle operation (vehicle runnonds), it indicates that there iShould this occur, have the vpossible.










NOTE:• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible

with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of thesesystems may result in vehicle starting problems andloss of security protection.

• Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmit-ters, or any other transponder-equipped componentson the same key chain will not cause a fault unless theadditional part is physically held against the RKEtransmitter being used to start the vehicle. Cellphones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not causeinterference with this system.

All of the RKE transmitters provided with your newvehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed tothe vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. Once an RKE tranvehicle, it cannot be program

CAUTI

Always remove the keys fromdoors when leaving the veh

At the time of purchase, the owith a four-digit Personal IdeKeep the PIN in a secure required for authorized dealermitters. Duplication of RKE formed at an authorized deale

Key Programming procedure.programming a blank transmiics. A blank transmitter is programmed.










NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizersystem serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters withyou to the authorized dealer.

Customer Key ProgrammingIf you have two valid RKE transmitters with integratedkeys, you can program new transmitters to the system byperforming the following procedure:

1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignitionswitch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position forat least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position andremove the first key.

2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn theignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the VehicleSecurity Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switchto the LOCK position and remove the second key.

3. Insert a blank integrated kand turn the ignition switch 60 seconds. After 10 seconds,and the Vehicle Security Lightagain for three seconds, and t

The new integrated key is promitter will also be programm

Repeat this procedure to progrdo not have a programmed Rgrated key, contact your auth

NOTE: If a programmed keydealer to have all remaining

tem’s memory. This will pstarting your vehicle. The remreprogrammed. All vehicle authorized dealer at the reprogrammed.










General InformationThe Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may bereceived, including interference that may cause undes-ired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARMThis Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unautho-rized operation. When the alarm is activated, the Vehicle

Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals.The horn, headlights, and tail lights will sound/flashrepeatedly for three minutes. If disturbance is stillpresent (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, igni-tion) after three minutes, the headlights and tail lightswill flash for an additional 15 minutes.

NOTE: The Panic and Securent. Please take a moment to Security modes to hear the diffone should go off in the futuwhich mode has been activate

Rearming The System

If something triggers the alarmdisarm it, the Vehicle Securihorn after three minutes, turnafter 15 minutes, and then the rearm itself.

To Set the Alarm

The alarm will set when youEntry (RKE) transmitter to locwhen you use the power dooris open. After all the doors aVehicle Security Light (locatedwill flash rapidly for about 16










Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 secondarming period, opening any door or the liftgate willcancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm success-fully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at aslower rate to indicate the alarm is set.

To Disarm the System

To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need topress the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter orturn the ignition key to the ON position. If something hastriggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, thehorn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.Check the vehicle for tampering.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect yourvehicle; however, you can create conditions where theVehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If youremain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKEtransmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,

the alarm will sound. If this o button on the RKE transmitSecurity Alarm. You may alsVehicle Security Alarm by unwith the key and then locking

but the Vehicle Security Alarm

ILLUMINATED ENTRYThe interior lights come on wuse the Remote Keyless Entrylock any door. They will remaafter all doors are closed then

The lights also will fade to off

after you close all the doors.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRYThis system allows you to locliftgate, or activate the panic aapproximately 30 ft (9 m) u










Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitterdoes not need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate thesystem.

NOTE: Inserting the RKE transmitter into the ignitionswitch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter;however, the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitterswill continue to work. Driving the vehicle over 5 mphdisables all RKE transmitter buttons, for all RKE trans-mitters, until the ignition is turned back to OFF/LOCK.

To Unlock the Doors

Press and release the UNLOtransmitter once to unlock theunlock all doors. The turn acknowledge the unlock signsystem will also turn on.

Three-Button RK










Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors FirstPressThis feature lets you program the system to unlock eitherthe driver’s door, or all doors, on the first press of theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote KeyUnlock” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of thismanual.

Flash Lights with Remote Key LockThis feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash whenthe doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-ter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change thecurrent setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped wInformation Center (EVIC),Lock” under “PersonaProgrammable Features)” Information Center (EVIC

manual.

Turn Headlights On with RThis feature activates the headwhen the doors are unlockedThe time for this feature is pequipped with the Electronic V(EVIC). For details, refer to “H“Personal Settings (Customer

in the “Electronic Vehicle InfoSection 4 of this manual.


p








To Lock the DoorsPress and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash andthe horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Sound Horn with Remote Key LockThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doorsare locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can beturned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed asfollows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn withLock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of thismanual.

To Release the Liftgate FliPress the FLIPPER GLASS/Ttwo times (the second press wpress) to open liftgate flipper

WARNDriving with the flipper glsonous exhaust gases into yopassengers could be injurethe flipper glass closed whvehicle.

Express Down Window Fe

This feature allows you to remwindows at the same time. Torelease the UNLOCK button othen immediately press and huntil the windows lower to thelower completely.


p








Using the Panic AlarmTo turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and holdthe PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least onesecond and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, theheadlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse

on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unlessyou turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button asecond time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph(24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition

switch to the ACC or ON position while the PanicAlarm is activated. However, the exterior lights andhorn will remain on.

Programming Additional TRefer to Sentry Key “Custom

If you do not have a progcontact your authorized deale

Transmitter Battery ServicThe recommended replacem

battery.

NOTE:• Perchlorate Material — sp

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haza

• Do not touch the battery terhousing or the printed circ


p







1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slotand gently pry open the access door.

2. Remove and replace the banew batteries with your fing

battery deterioration. If you torubbing alcohol.

3. Reposition the access dooopening and snap into place.

General InformationThis device complies with paRSS 210 of Industry Canada. following conditions:

• This device may not cause

• This device must accept including interference thoperation.

NOTE: Changes or modifiproved by the party responsvoid the user’s authority to op

Battery Replacement

1— Battery Access Door


p







If your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter fails tooperate from a normal distance, check for these twoconditions.

1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expectedlife of the battery is a minimum of three years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio stationtower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-niently from outside the vehicle while stillmaintaining security. The system has a range of

328 ft (100 m).

How to Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before theengine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Liftgate closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brak

• Ignition key removed from

• Battery at an acceptable ch

• RKE PANIC button not pre

To Enter Remote Start ModPress and release thon the RKE transmionds. The parking liwill chirp twice (if

engine will start and the vRemote Start mode for a 15 m


p







NOTE:• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and

then shut down 10 seconds later.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on duringRemote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sunroof op-eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle isin the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position

before you can repeat the start sequence for a third

cycle.To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving theVehiclePress and release the REMOTE START button one time orallow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentionwill disable the one time pre

button for two seconds afterStart request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode Before the end of 15 minute cUNLOCK button on the RKEdoors and disarm the Veequipped). Then, prior to the insert the key into the ignitionto the ON position.

• The ignition switch must order to drive the vehicle.

• For vehicles equipped wInformation Center (EVIC)Turn To Run” will flash inthe key. Once inserted, thewill flash in the EVIC unti


p







DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors frominside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the dooris closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key

is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of anaccident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, aswell as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle always remove the keyfrom the ignition, and lock your vehicle. Do notleave unattended children in the vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use ofvehicle equipment may cause severe personal in-juries and death.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switch ispanel. Press the switch to lock

If the plunger is down when twill lock. Therefore, make suvehicle before closing the doo

Power Door L


p






If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in theignition switch, and the driver’s door is open, the doorswill not lock.

The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicleuntil you pull up the lock plungers.

Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If EquippedIf Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all thedoors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle isstopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “AutoUnlock on Exit” under the “Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC),” in section 4 of this manual or seeyour authorized dealer.

Automatic Door LocksIf this feature is selected, your door locks will lockautomatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph(24 km/h) and all doors are closed. It will reset whenevera door is opened.

This feature is selectable andRefer to “Auto Door LoProgrammable Features” in thmation Center (EVIC),” in Secyour authorized dealer.

Child Protection Door LocThe rear doors of your vehiclProtection Door Locks. If you popen edge of the door it cannoof the vehicle. Push the leveChild Protection Door Locks.

WARN

Avoid trapping anyone in tRemember that the rear dofrom the outside when thLocks are engaged.







WINDOWS

Power Windows

The power window controls are located on the driver’sdoor trim panel. There is a single switch on the frontpassenger door/rear doors which operates the front

passenger/rear passenger docontrols will operate only whthe ON or ACCESSORY posit

The power window switche10 minutes after the ignition swOpening a vehicle front door

Child Protection Door Lock

Power Window


GS O O O S G O C






Auto DownBoth the driver and front passenger window switch hasan “Auto Down” feature. Press the window switch pastthe first detent, release, and the window will go downautomatically. To cancel the “Auto Down” movement,

operate the switch in either the up or down direction andrelease the switch.

To open the window part way, press to the first detentand release it when you want the window to stop.

The power window switches remain active for 10 min-utes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Openingeither front door will cancel this feature.

Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection —Driver’s and Front Passenger Door OnlyLift the window switch to the second detent, release, andthe window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from goinAuto Up operation, push dow

To close the window part waythe first detent and release whestop.

NOTE: If the window runsAuto Up it will reverse directithe obstacle and use the windowindow. Any impact due to rtrigger the auto reverse funcAuto Up. If this happens, pufirst detent and hold it to clos

WARN

There is no anti-pinch proteis almost closed. Be sure to window before closing.








Resetting the Auto Up FeatureShould the Auto Up feature stop working, the windowprobably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

Pull the window switch up and close the window com-pletely, then pull and hold the switch for one second.

Window Lockout SwitchThe window lockout switch on the driver’s door allowsyou to disable the window controls on the other doors. Todisable the window controls on the other doors, press thewindow lockout button. To enable the window controls,press the window lockout button again.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be descrpressure on the ears or a helears. Your vehicle may exhibwindows down, or the sunro

Window Lock








open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withthe sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimizethe buffeting.

LIFTGATE

To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle andlift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with theplunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock theliftgate.

WARNDriving with the liftgate opexhaust gases into your vehsengers could be injured bliftgate closed when you are

Liftgate R








Liftgate Flipper GlassThe liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when theliftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up onthe window switch located on the liftgate.

WARN

To avoid injury, stand back wautomatically rise.

Once the liftgate flipper glasstion to the rear window wiperactivation of the rear wiper blis open.

NOTE: If a malfunction tooccur, an emergency liftgate lopen the liftgate. The emergen

be accessed through a snap

liftgate trim panel.

Liftgate Glass Release








WARNING!

Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi-sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and yourpassengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep

the flipper glass closed when you are operating thevehicle.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in yourvehicle are the restraint systems. These include the frontand rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, frontairbags for both the driver and right front passenger, andwindow bags for the driver and passengers seated next toa window. If you will be carrying children too small foradult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to holdinfant and child restraint systems.

NOTE: The front airbags hdesign. This allows the airbaginflation that are based on co

Please pay close attention tsection. It tells you how to u

properly to keep you and ypossible.

WARN

• In a collision, you and yoinjuries, including fatalierly buckled up. You can vehicle or other passenge

out of the vehicle. Alwayin your vehicle are buckl


THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE SOfrecido por www.electromanuales.com





WARNING! (Continued)

• Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,even on short trips. Someone on the road may be apoor driver and cause a collision which includesyou. This can happen far away from home or onyour own street.

• Research has shown that seat belts save lives, andthey can reduce the seriousness of injuries in acollision. Some of the worst injuries happen whenpeople are thrown from the vehicle. Seat beltsreduce the possibility of ejection and the risk ofinjury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all

times to reduce or prevent injuries.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle have combinationlap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.

This feature allows the shouldfreely with you under normasion, the belt will lock and redthe inside of the vehicle or be

WARN• Wearing a seat belt incor

belts are designed to go ayour body. These are thebody and can take the forWearing your belt in the your injuries in a collisionsuffer internal injuries, or

of part of the belt. Followear your seat belt safelsengers safe, too.


38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEOfrecido por www.electromanuales.com






• Two people should never be belted into a singleseat belt. People belted together can crash into oneanother in an accident, hurting one another badly.Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for morethan one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back andadjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch

plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the beltgo around your lap.

3. When the belt is long eno

plate into the buckle until you

Latch P







WARN

• A belt that is buckled intnot protect you properlyride too high on your

internal injuries. Always buckle nearest you.

• A belt that is too loose wiIn a sudden stop you couincreasing the possibilitybelt snugly.

Latch Plate to Buckle








• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces ofthe vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neckinjury. A belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so thatyour strongest bones will take the force in acollision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protectyou from injury during a collision. You are morelikely to hit your head in a collision if you do notwear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below yourabdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a

bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too

tight, tilt the latch plate and p belt reduces the risk of slidcollision.

WARN

• A lap belt worn too highinjury in a collision. The bstrong hip and pelvic bodomen. Always wear the as low as possible and ke

• A twisted belt can’t do its it could even cut into ystraight. If you can’t st

vehicle, take it to your auit fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt comfortable and not resting owill withdraw any slack in th






6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS

on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to itsstowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate downthe webbing to allow it to retract fully.

WARN

A frayed or torn belt could rileave you with no protectionperiodically, checking for c

Damaged parts must be renot disassemble or modifassemblies must be replacedhave been damaged (bent etc.).

Adjustable Upper ShouldeIn the front seating positionsadjusted upward or downwar

from your neck. Press the relanchorage, and then move it uthat serves you best.

Removing Slack from Belt






As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release theanchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure thatit is locked in position.

Automatic Locking Mode —In this mode, the shoulder locked. The belt will still retrthe shoulder belt.

When to Use the Automatic

Use Automatic Locking modeis installed in the rear center 12 years old and younger shoin the rear seat whenever pos

How to Use the Automatic

1. Buckle the combination lap

2. Grasp the shoulder portion

the entire belt is fully extende

3. Allow the belt to retract. Ashear a clicking sound. This inow in the Automatic Lockin

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt






How to Disengage the Automatic Locking ModeDisconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allowit to retract completely to disengage the AutomaticLocking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emer-gency) Locking mode.

Energy Management FeatureThis vehicle has a safety belt system with an EnergyManagement feature in the front seating positions to helpfurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-oncollision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that isdesigned to release webbing in a controlled manner. Thisfeature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on

the occupant’s chest.

WARN

• The belt and retractor assif the seat belt assemblytractor (ALR) feature or a

tion is not working procording to the procedures

• Failure to replace the belcould increase the risk of

Seat Belt Pretensioners

The driver and front passengwith a pretensioning device tany slack from the seat belt

collision. This device improvseat belt by assuring that thoccupant early in a collision. size occupants, including thos






NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still beworn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-straint Control (ORC). Like the front airbags, the preten-

sioners are a single use item. After a collision that issevere enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,they must be replaced.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speedis greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Seat Belt

Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct allother occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once thewarning is triggered, BeltAlert will continue to chimeand flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or

until the driver’s seat belt is breactivated if the driver’s seatthan 10 seconds and the veh5 mph (8 km/h).

BeltAlert can be enabled or d

dealer or by following these s

NOTE: The following steps 60 seconds of the ignition swior START position. Chrysler deactivating BeltAlert.

1. Turn the ignition switch buckle the driver’s seat belt.

2. Turn the ignition key to thedoes not need to be running),Reminder Light to turn off.






3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckleand then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least threetimes within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt

buckled.

4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single

chime will sound to signify that you have successfullycompleted the programming.

BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, theSeat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminatewhile the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened.

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsthroughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe isthe best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should weacross the thighs and as snug Keep the belt low so that it abdomen. That way the strongthe force if there is a collision

Seat Belt ExtenderIf a seat belt is too short, evenwhen the adjustable upper shequipped) is in its lowest dealer can provide you withextender should be used onlylong enough. When it is nottender and store it.






WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed canincrease the risk of injury in a collision. Only usewhen the lap belt is not long enough when it is wornlow and snug, and in the recommended seatingpositions. Remove and store the extender when notneeded.

Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint Systems (SRS)

This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and rightfront passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraintsystems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the

steering wheel. The front passenger airbag is mounted inthe instrument panel, above the glove compartment. Thewords SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.

NOTE: The front airbags aregulations that allow less for

1 — Driver Airbag2 — Passenger Airbag3 — Knee Bolster






The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. Thismay allow the airbags to have different rates of inflationthat are based on collision severity and occupant size.

This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect thedriver, and front and rear passengers sitting next to a

window. They are located above the side windows. Theircovers are also labeled SRS/AIRBAG.

NOTE: Airbag covers may no

trim; but they will open to all

Window Airba






WARNING!

• Do not put anything on or around the front airbagcovers or attempt to manually open them. You maydamage the airbags and you could be injuredbecause the airbags are no longer functional.These protective covers for the airbag cushions aredesigned to open only when the airbags are inflat-ing.

• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up highenough to block the location of the window bag.The area where the window bag is located shouldremain free from any obstructions.

(Continued)

WARNING! (

• Do not have any accessowill alter the roof, includyour vehicle. Do not addpermanent attachments (b

lation on the vehicle roof.of the vehicle for any rea

• Do not cover or place iteThese items may causeinflation.

NOTE: Do not use a clothinhooks in this vehicle. A clot

proper performance of the wiThe front airbags have a multallows the airbags to have diffare based on collision severity






front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol-sters to provide improved protection for the driver andfront passenger. Window bags also work with seat beltsto improve occupant protection.

The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types

of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate tosevere frontal collisions.

The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle istriggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certaintypes of collisions, both the front and side airbags may betriggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,you need the seat belts to keep you in the right positionfor the airbags to protect you properly.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize therisk of harm from a deploying airbag.

1. Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat.

WARN

Infants in rear facing child rride in the front seat of a vairbag. An airbag deployminjury or death to infants in

Children that are not big enovehicle seat belt should be sechild restraint or belt-positiochildren who do not use positioning booster seats shoup in the rear seat. Never alshoulder belt behind them or

If a child from 1 to 12 years passenger seat because the veseat as far back as possible, restraint. Refer to “Child Rest






You should read the instructions provided with yourchild restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder beltsproperly.

3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room toinflate.

4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags willinflate forcefully into the space between you and thedoor.

5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to bemodified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the

Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If You Need Assistance” in Section 9 of this manual.

WARN

• Relying on the airbags asevere injuries in a colliwith your seat belt to resome collisions the airbAlways wear your seat beairbags.

• Being too close to the steepanel during airbag deplous injury. Airbags need comfortably extending ysteering wheel or instrum

• Side curtain airbags need

lean against the door or wcenter of the seat.






Airbag System ComponentsThe airbag system consists of the following:

• Occupant Restraint Control (ORC)

• Airbag Warning Light

•

Driver Airbag• Passenger Airbag

• Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows

• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors

• Driver Side Seat Track Position Sensor

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Interconnecting Wiring

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Front Acceleration Sensors

• Driver and Front Passenge

How the Airbag System Wo

• The Occupant Restraint Co

a frontal, side, or rollover corequire the front and/or sfront airbag inflators are derates of airbag inflation fromORC. The ORC will detect r

The ORC also monitors theparts of the system whenevthe START or ON position

items listed above except thment panel, and the steerinkey is in the LOCK positionot in the ignition, the airbinflate.






• The ORC also turns on the Airbag WarningLight for 2.5 to 8 seconds for a self-checkwhen the ignition is first turned on. After theself-check, the Airbag Warning Light will

turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any partof the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Lighteither momentarily or continuously. A single chimewill sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags toprotect you in a collision. If the light does not comeon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comeson as you drive, have the airbag system checked rightaway.

• The Driver and Passengerlocated in the center of the sside of the instrument panecollision requiring the airbunits. A large quantity of ninflate the front airbags. Difare possible, based on collisize. The steering wheel huright side of the instrumenout of the way as the bags i

bags fully inflate in about 5about half of the time it tak

bags then quickly deflate wdriver and front passenger.

The driver front airbag gas holes in the sides of the aiairbag gas is vented throughof the airbag. In this way, twith your control of the ve






• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de-signed to activate only in certain side or rollovercollisions. When the Occupant Restraint Control(ORC) detects a collision requiring the window bags toinflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of thevehicle, and both sides of the vehicle when rollover is

sensed. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated toinflate the window bag. The inflating window bagpushes the outside edge of the headliner out of theway and covers the window. The airbag inflates inabout 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time ittakes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injureyou if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag

inflates. This especially applies to children. The win-dow bag is only about 3 in (8 cm) thick when it isinflated.

• The Knee Impact Bolstersthe driver and the front pasone for the best interaction

If a Deployment OccursThe airbag system is desig

Occupant Restraint Control (Osevere frontal collision, to hefront passenger, and then to i

NOTE: A frontal collision thneed airbag protection will nodoes not mean something isystem.

If you do have a collision that all of the following may occu

• The nylon airbag material msions and/or skin reddenipassenger as the airbags






abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or thoseyou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasiumfloor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.However, if you haven’t healed significantly within afew days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor

immediately.

• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-likeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of theprocess that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbaginflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throatirritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,see your doctor. If these particles settle on yourclothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-tions for cleaning.

• It is not advisable to driairbags have deployed. If ycollision, the airbags will no

WARN

Deployed airbags and seat bprotect you in another collseat belt pretensioners, and bly, replaced by an authopossible.

Enhanced Accident ResponIf the airbags deploy after ansystem remains functional, power door locks will unlocklights will flash and the fuel wIn addition, after the vehicleinterior lights will illuminate tlit until the ignition switch is






NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if thekey is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle isdriven.

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!• Modifications to any part of the airbag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You couldbe injured if the airbag system is not there toprotect you. Do not modify the components orwiring, including adding any kind of badges orstickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper or vehicle body struc-ture.

(Continued)

WARNING! (

• You need proper knee collision. Do not mount oequipment on or behind

• It is dangerous to try to

airbag system yourself. Bworks on your vehicle tha

NOTE: Perchlorate Materiaapply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/h

b h bl k f bl f f






Airbag Warning LightYou will want to have the airbag system ready to inflatefor your protection in an impact. The airbag system isdesigned to be maintenance free. If any of the followingoccurs, have an authorized dealer service the systempromptly:

• Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the sixto eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turnedon,

• Remains on after the six to eight second interval, or

• Flickers, or comes on and remains on for any period of time while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any enginerelated gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be readyto inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse

block for blown fuses. Refer tomanual. See your authorized

Event Data Recorder (EDR)In the event of an accident, yrecord up to five seconds of sp

eters (see the following list) prior to the moment of airdeployment, and up to one-qudeceleration data during and/or near-deployment. EDR datairbag deploys, or nearly deunavailable.

NOTE:•

A near-deployment eventsensor detects severe vehicdicative of a crash, but notairbag deployment.

U d i i EDR d b i h l l j i di i (i






• Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not berecorded (e.g., loss of battery power).

In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-plete accident investigation, the electronic data may beused by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the

possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in orderto assess and improve vehicle performance. In additionto crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, suchinvestigations may be requested by customers, insurancecarriers, government officials, and professional crashresearchers, such as those associated with universities,and with hospital and insurance organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by

Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or itsdesignated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usuallythe vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a

court with legal jurisdiction (iA copy of the data will be provupon request. General data tticular vehicles or crashes maration in aggregate crash datatained by the U.S. government

a potentially sensitive natureparticular driver, vehicle, or cdentially. Confidential data Chrysler LLC to any third pa

1. Used for research purposwith a particular crash recordprovided confidentiality of ppreserved.

2. Used in defense of litigationproduct.

3. Requested by police under

4 Oth i i d b l T i i l ti






4. Otherwise required by law.

Data parameters that may be recorded:

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp statusfor electronically-controlled safety systems, includingthe airbag system

• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)

• ЉTimeЉ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignitioncycles and vehicle mileage)

• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)

• Impact acceleration and angle

• Seat belt status

• Brake status (service and parking brakes)

• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)

• Engine control status (including engine speed)

• Transmission gear selection

• Cruise control status

• Traction/stability control st

• Tire Pressure Monitoring S

Child RestraintsEveryone in your vehicle neetime — babies and children, toStates, and all Canadian prochildren ride in proper restraiand you can be prosecuted fo

Children 12 years and under sled up in a rear seat, if avai

statistics, children are safer wthe rear seats rather than in th

There are different sizes anchildren from newborn size

h f d lt f t b lt Al h k th hild I f t d Child R t i t






enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the childseat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seatfor your child. Use the restraint that is correct for yourchild.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,can become a missile inside the vehicle. The forcerequired to hold even an infant on your lap canbecome so great that you could not hold the child, nomatter how strong you are. The child and otherscould be badly injured. Any child riding in yourvehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’ssize.

Infants and Child Restraint

• Safety experts recommerearward-facing in the vehone year old and weigh at leof child restraints can be us

carriers and convertible chi• The infant carrier is only u

vehicle. It is recommended to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Conhave a higher weight limdirection than infant carrierearward-facing by childre20 lbs (9 kg) but are less tha

of child restraints are helap/shoulder belt or the Lchorage system (Refer to Lchorage System in this sect

Here are some tips for getting






WARNING!

• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be usedin the front seat of a vehicle with the front passen-ger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. Anairbag deployment could cause severe injury or

death to infants in this position.• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in acollision. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-actly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• A rearward facing infant restraint should only beused in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant

restraint in the front seat may be struck by adeploying passenger airbag which may cause se-vere or fatal injury to the infant.

Here are some tips for gettingrestraint:

• Before buying any restrainhas a label certifying that itStandards. Chrysler LLC a

try a child restraint in the vuse it before you buy it.

• The restraint must be apweight and height. Check tweight and height limits.

• Carefully follow the instrurestraint. If you install the rnot work when you need i

• Except for the second row passenger seat belts are equplates. The second row cematic locking retractor. Bo

designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child buckle or latch plate is t






designed to keep the lap portion tight around the childrestraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up onthe shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt willtighten the belt (the cinching latch plate will keep the

belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen

with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull ittight if necessary). For the second row center seat beltwith the automatic locking retractor, pull the belt fromthe retractor until there is enough allowance to pass itthrough the child restraint and slide the latch plateinto the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fullyextended from the retractor. Allow the belt to returninto the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to

tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Foradditional information, refer to ЉAutomatic LockingModeЉ earlier in this section.

• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening thelap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the

buckle or latch plate is topening on the restraint. Dfrom the buckle and twistseveral times to shorten it.the buckle with the release

•

If the belt still cannot be tipushing on the restraint lothe latch plate from thearound, and insert the laagain. If you still cannotsecure, try a different seatin

• Buckle the child into themanufacturer’s instructions

• When your child restraint isvehicle with the seat belt or Do not leave it loose in the vcollision, it could strike the cause serious personal inju

NOTE: For additional information refer to belt-positioning booster sea






NOTE: For additional information refer towww.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.

Older Children and Child RestraintsChildren who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who areolder than one year, can ride forward-facing in the

vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible childseats used in the forward-facing direction, are for chil-dren who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who areolder than one year. These child seats are also held in thevehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH childrestraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — ChildSeat Anchorage System in this section.)

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing

more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fitthe vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sitwith knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while thechild’s back is against the seatback, they should use a

belt-positioning booster seapositioning booster seat are lap/shoulder belt.

Children Too Large for BooChildren who are large enoug

comfortably, and whose legsover the front of the seat wheseatback, should use the lap/s

• Make sure that the child is

• The lap portion should be loas possible.

• Check belt fit periodically

slouching can move the be• If the shoulder belt contacts

child closer to the center ofchild to put the shoulder bethe back.

LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower kits or retro-fit kits You are ur






LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System (LowerAnchors and Tether for CHildren)Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the childrestraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCHsystem provides for the installation of the child restraintwithout using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing

the child restraint using lower anchorages and uppertether straps from the child restraint to the vehiclestructure.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-able. However, because the lower anchorages are to beintroduced over a period of years, child restraint systemshaving attachments for those anchorages will continue toalso have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat

belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks forconnection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-able for some time. For some older child restraints, manychild restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap

kits or retro fit kits. You are urthe available attachments prostraint in any vehicle.

NOTE: When using the LAinstall a child restraint, pleas

not being used for occupant reof reach of children. Remindthat the seat belts are not toyswith, and never leave yourvehicle.

All three rear seating positiothat are capable of accommodchild seats having flexible, w

tachments. Child seats withmust be installed in the outboaless of the specific type of loinstall LATCH-compatible chishare a common lower ancho

If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints The rear seat lower anchorage






If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraintsin adjacent rear seating positions, you can use theLATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboardposition, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at thecenter position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using

the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instruc-tions, refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible ChildRestraint System”.

Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child RestraintSystemWe urge that you carefully follow the directions of themanufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not allchild restraint systems will be installed as described here.

Again, carefully follow the installation instructions thatwere provided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchoragethe rear of the seat cushion wand are just visible when youinstall the child restraint. You run your finger along the interseat cushion surfaces.

Latch Anch

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each means of adjusting the tensi






In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind eachrear seating position located on the back of the seat.

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped withseparate straps on each side, with each having a hook orconnector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a

means of adjusting the tensifacing toddler restraints andrestraints will also be equipphook for attachment to the tetmeans of adjusting the tensio

First, loosen the adjusters on ttether strap so that you can mor connectors to the vehicle anlower hooks or connectors ov

bars, pushing aside the seat cthe tether anchorage directly are placing the child restraint to the anchorage, being carefuprovide the most direct path b

child restraint. Finally, tightepush the child restraint rearwaseat, removing slack in the strrestraint manufacturer’s instru

Tether Strap Mounting

WARNING!For seat belts having an Au






WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to theLATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant orchild restraint. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle SeatBeltsThe passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which aredesigned to keep the lap portion tight around the childrestraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If

the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on theshoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight,however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.

g(ALR), pull the belt from the reallowance to pass it through tthe latch plate into the buckle. fully extended from the retractinto the retractor, pulling on th

the lap portion about the childmatic Locking Mode” earlier i

In the rear seat, you may halap/shoulder belt on the ch

buckle or latch plate is too cloon the restraint. Disconnect

buckle and twist the short buto shorten it. Insert the latch pl

release button facing out.

If the belt still can’t be tightepushing on the restraint looseto do something more. Disco

the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch






, ,plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make thechild restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the

hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.For the outboard seating positions, route the tether overthe head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchorlocated on the back of the seat.

WARNING!

Always remove the subwoofer from the vehiclewhenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer

are required for proper installation of a child re-straining device. In the event of an accident, or undersevere vehicle maneuvers, leaving the subwooferunsecured in the vehicle could result in serious orfatal injury to anyone in the vehicle.

Tether Strap

WARNING!Drive moderately during the






WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead toincreased head motion and possible injury to thechild. Use only the anchor positions directly behindthe child seat to secure a child restraint top tether

strap.

Transporting PetsAirbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possiblyinjured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or ina collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat inpet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONSA long break-in period is not required for the engine inyour vehicle.

y gAfter the initial 60 miles (1055 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are d

While cruising, brief full-throlimits of local traffic laws, conWide-open throttle acceleratiomental and should be avoided

The engine oil installed in thhigh-quality energy conservchanges should be consistenconditions under which vehThe recommended viscosityshown under “Engine Oil”, u

dures” in section 7 of this maOR STRAIGHT MINERAL USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first fewWARNING! (






g y gthousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should beconsidered as a normal part of the break-in and notinterpreted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting PassengersNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOAREA.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (

• Do not allow people to vehicle that is not equipbelts.

• Be sure everyone in you

using a seat belt properly

Exhaust Gas

WARN

Exhaust gases can injure or kmonoxide (CO), which is Breathing it can make yo

eventually poison you. Tofollow these safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined damaged, have a competent m






areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in orout of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the enginerunning, adjust your heating or cooling controls to forceoutside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,make sure that all windows are closed and the climatecontrol BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOTuse the recirculation mode.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaustsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside thevehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

plete exhaust system and adjacdamaged, deteriorated, or mseams or loose connections coto seep into the passenger cinspect the exhaust system eac

for lubrication or oil change. R

Safety Checks You Should

Vehicle

Seat BeltsInspect the belt system periofrays, and loose parts. Damagimmediately. Do not disassem

Front seat belt assemblies mcollision. Rear seat belt assemba collision if they have been datorn webbing, etc.). If there is aor retractor condition, replace

Airbag Warning Light lodged in the tread. Inspect t






The light should come on and remain on for six to eightseconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is firstturned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see yourauthorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comeson while driving, have the system checked by an autho-

rized dealer.

DefrosterCheck operation by selecting the defrost mode and placethe blower control on high speed. You should be able tofeel the air directed against the windshield. See yourauthorized dealer for service if your defroster isinoperable.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

TiresExamine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wearpatterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

cuts and cracks. Check the Check the tires (including spa

LightsHave someone observe the owhile you work the controls. C

beam indicator lights on the i

Door LatchesCheck for positive closing, lat

Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle afterengine coolant, oil, or other flfumes are detected or if fuel

brake fluid leaks are suspeclocated and corrected immedi






UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOU






UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOU

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 78

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 80

▫ Driver’s And Front Passenger Outside

Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped . . 80

▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirro

▫ Sun Visor Extension — If

Ⅵ uconnect phone — If Equ

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . .

▫ Phone Call Features . .

▫ uconnect phone Feature

▫ Advanced Phone Connec

▫ Things You Should Knowuconnect phone . . . . .

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Front Heated Seats — If

74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOfrecido por www.electromanuales.com





Ⅵ Voice Recognition System (VR) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 110

▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Ⅵ Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 115

▫ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . 116

▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment . . . . . . 116

▫ Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 117▫ Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

▫ Rear Heated Seats — If E

▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . .

Ⅵ Driver Memory Seat — If E

▫ Setting Memory PositionRemote Keyless Entry (RMemory . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Memory Position Recall

▫ To Disable A RKE TransmMemory . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . .

Ⅵ To Open And Close The H

Ⅵ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Multifunction Lever . .

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 130 ▫ Headlight Time Delay .

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATU






▫ Automatic Headlight System —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ SmartBeams — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 133

▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HIDHeadlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

▫ Instrument Panel And Interior Lights . . . . . . 134

▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

▫ High Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . .

▫ Front Map/Reading Ligh

Ⅵ Windshield Wipers And W

▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Speed Sensitive Intermitt

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — I

Ⅵ Tilt/Telescoping Steering C

Ⅵ Adjustable Pedals — If Equ

Ⅵ Electronic Speed Control —

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . .

▫ To Set At A Desired Spee

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . .

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Ⅵ Overhead Console . . . . .

76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE






▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Ⅵ Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display . . . . . . . . 148

▫ Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . 150

▫ Service The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Ⅵ Rear Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off — WithNavigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off —Without Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights

▫ Sunglasses Storage . . .

Ⅵ Garage Door Opener — If

▫ Programming HomeLink▫ Gate Operator/Canadian

▫ Using HomeLink . . .

▫ Reprogramming A SingleHomeLink Button . . .

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . ▫ General Information . .

Ⅵ Power Sunroof — If Equipp

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Ⅵ Power Inverter — If Equipp







▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Ⅵ Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ Front Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 163

Ⅵ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Cargo Area Features . . .

▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . .

▫ Rear Storage Compartme▫ Retractable Cargo Area C

If Equipped . . . . . . . .

▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . .

Ⅵ Rear Window Features . .

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Wa▫ Rear Window Defroster

Ⅵ Roof Luggage Rack — If Eq

MIRRORS







Inside Day/Night Mirror

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal andvertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the nightposition (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirrorshould be adjusted while set in the day position (towardthe windshield).

Automatic Dimming MirrorThis mirror automatically a

from vehicles behind you. Youoff by pressing the button at thnext to the button will illumidimming feature is activated.

Adjusting Rear

Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit







CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, neverspray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe themirror clean.

To receive maximum benefit,to center on the adjacent lanoverlap of the view obtained

WARN

Vehicles and other objects sconvex mirror will look smthan they really are. Relypassenger side convex mircollide with another vehicleinside mirror when judgingvehicle seen in the passenSome vehicles will not have

mirror.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

Outside Mirrors Folding FeatureAll outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either

After selecting a mirror, modirection you want the mirror







All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved eitherforward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges havethree detent positions: full forward, full rearward andnormal.

Driver’s And Front Passenger Outside Automatic

Dimming Mirrors — If EquippedIf your vehicle is equipped with outside automatic dim-ming mirrors, they will operate when the inside auto-matic dimming mirror is on. The outside mirrors operateoff the inside mirror switch and will automatically adjustfor annoying headlight glare when the inside mirrordoes.

Outside Power Mirrors

The power mirror switch is located on the drivers doortrim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotaryknob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.

direction you want the mirror position to guard against accposition.

Power Mirro

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled bythe optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver







the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to DriverMemory Seat” in this Section for further information.

Heated Mirrors — If EquippedThese mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. Thisfeature is activated whenever you turn on the rear

window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” inthis Section for further information.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

To access a n illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the visors.

Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn onautomatically.

Sun Visor Extension — If E

This feature has a pull out ext

increased coverage.

Illuminated Va

uconnect phone — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE Th l d RER d REU di t i

NOTE:• The uconnect phone re







NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain anintegrated uconnect phone. Refer to your “NavigationUser’s Manual” for uconnect phone operating instruc-tions for these radios. Radio sales code can be locatedon the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate.

uconnect phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. uconnect allows you todial a phone number with your cellular phone usingsimple voice commands (e.g., ЉCall” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”WorkЉ orЉDial” ѧ “248-555-1212Љ). Your cellular phone’s audio istransmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; thesystem will automatically mute your radio when usingthe uconnect phone.

pequipped with the BluetoVersion 0.96 or higher. Seesupported phones.

For uconnect customer sup

websites:

• www.chrysler.com/uconne

• www.dodge.com/uconnect

• www.jeep.com/uconnect

• or call 1–877–855–8400

uconnect allows you to tran

tem and your cellular phonevehicle and enables you to mufor private conversation.

The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth

“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect featuresradio or the mirror has the twButton and VOICE RECOGN







pBluetooth technology - the global standard that enablesdifferent electronic devices to connect to each otherwithout wires or a docking station, so uconnect phoneworks no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be

it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phoneis turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’suconnect phone. The uconnect phone allows up toseven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Onlyone linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with thesystem at a time. The system is available in English,Spanish, or French languages.

Phone Button

The rearview mirror contains the microphonefor the system (depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped), and either the

enable you to access the syste

Voice Recognition ButtonActual button locatdio. The individual b

“Operation” section

The uconnect phone can be Profile certified Bluetooth

uconnect website for supporphone supports a different pryou may not be able to ufeatures. Refer to your cellul

phone manufacturer for detaiThe uconnect phone is fullycle’s audio system. The volum

can be adjusted either from the radio volume controlknob or from the steering wheel radio control (right

• For certain operations, comused. For example, instead







g ( gswitch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts fromthe uconnect phone such as ЉCELLЉ or caller ID oncertain radios.

OperationVoice commands can be used to operate the uconnect

phone and to navigate through the uconnect phonemenu structure. Voice commands are required after mostuconnect phone prompts. You will be prompted for aspecific command and then guided through the availableoptions.

•

Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait forthe beep, which follows the ЉReadyЉ prompt or anotherprompt.

pЉPhone Pairing,Љ the followcan be said: ЉSetup Phone P

• For each feature explanatiocombined form of the voic

can also break the commanpart of the command wheexample, you can use the cmand ЉPhonebook New Encombined form command ЉPhonebookЉ and ЉNew Enuconnect phone works bnormal conversational tone

sitting a few feet/meters awVoice Command TreeRefer to “Voice Tree” in this s

Help CommandIf you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to

To complete the pairing procence your cellular phone







y y p p yknow your options at any prompt, say ЉHelpЉ followingthe beep. The uconnect phone will play all the options atany prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the uconnect phone from idle, simply press

the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts fordirections. All uconnect phone sessions begin with apress of the PHONE button on the radio control head.

Cancel CommandAt any prompt, after the beep, you can say ЉCancelЉ andyou will be returned to the main menu. However, in afew instances the system will take you back to theprevious menu.

Pair (Link) uconnect phone to a Cellular PhoneTo begin using your uconnect phone, you must pairyour compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone.

y puconnect website may also prfor pairing.

The following are general ppairing instructions:

• Press the PHONE button to

• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt aЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ

• When prompted, after the bfollow the audible prompts

• You will be asked to say a

fication Number (PIN), whenter into your cellular pfour-digit PIN. You will notafter the initial pairing pro

• For identification purposes, you will be prompted togive the uconnect phone a name for your cellular

Dial by Saying a Number








phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should begiven a unique phone name.

• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone apriority level between one and seven, with one being

the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellularphones to your uconnect phone. However, at anygiven time, only one cellular phone can be in use,connected to your uconnect phone. The priorityallows the uconnect phone to know which cellularphone to use if multiple cellular phones are in thevehicle at the same time. For example, if priority threeand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the

uconnect

phone will use the priority three cellularphone when you make a call. You can select to use alower priority cellular phone at any time (refer toЉAdvanced Phone ConnectivityЉ in this section).


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt aЉDial.Љ

• The system will prompt y

want to call.

• For example, you can say Љ

• The uconnect phone will cand then dial. The numberof certain radios.

Call by Saying a Name

•

Press the PHONE button to• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt a

“Call.Љ

• The system will prompt you to say the name of theperson you want to call.

• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt aЉPhonebook New Entry.Љ







• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, saythe name of the person you want to call. For example,you can say Љ John Doe,Љ where John Doe is a previ-ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook

or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store aname in the phonebook, refer to ЉAdd Names to Youruconnect Phonebook,Љ in the phonebook.

• The uconnect system will confirm the name and thendial the corresponding phone number, which mayappear in the display of certain radios.

Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect phonebook isrecommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

• Press the PHONE button to begin.

• When prompted, say the nalong names helps the vorecommended. For exampЉRobertЉ instead of ЉBob.Љ

• When prompted, enter theЉHome,Љ ЉWork,Љ ЉMobile,Љ oyou to store multiple numentry, if desired.

• When prompted, recite thphonebook entry that you

After you are finished adding

book, you will be given the phone numbers to the currenmain menu.

The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32names in the phonebook with each name having up tof d h b d d h

• Automatic download and uas soon as the Bluetooth w

d h h







four associated phone numbers and designations. Eachlanguage has a separate 32-name phonebook accessibleonly in that language. In addition, if equipped andsupported by your phone, uconnect phone automati-

cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.Phonebook Download – Automatic PhonebookTransfer From Cellular PhoneIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone,uconnect phone automatically downloads names (textnames) and number entries from the cellular phone’sphonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone BookAccess Profile may support this feature. See uconnect

website for supported phones.• To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect)

Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying aName” section.

made to the uconnect phostart the vehicle.

• A maximum of 1000 entrieloaded and updated every

to the uconnect phone.

• Depending on the maximumloaded, there may be a shdownloaded names can beable, the previous downloadfor use.

• Only the phonebook of the

lar phone is accessible.• Only the cellular phone’s p

SIM card phonebook is not book.

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited ordeleted on the uconnect phone. These can only be

di d h ll l h Th h

NOTE:• The phone handset must s

f f h b k







edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the nextphone connection.

Phonebook Download — Single Entry

If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnectphone allows the user to download entries from theirphone via Bluetooth. To use this feature, press thePHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” Thesystem prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry viaBluetooth…” The system is now ready to accept phone-

book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth

Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone

Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to sendthese entries from your phone.

transfers of phonebook ent

• Some phones cannot send are already connected to aand you may see a message

the Bluetooth link is busyfirst disconnect or drop thethe uconnect phone, and tentry via Bluetooth. PleasManual for specific instrucBluetooth connection.

• If the phonebook entry is lowill only use the first 24 ch

Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries

NOTE:

After you are finished editing you will be given the opportunth h b k ll th b







• Editing names in the phonebook is recommendedwhen the vehicle is not in motion.

• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot bedeleted or edited.


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, sayЉPhonebook Edit.Љ

• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebookentry that you wish to edit.

• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,

cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.

• When prompted, recite the new phone number for thephonebook entry that you are editing.

the phonebook, call the numbeto the main menu.

ЉPhonebook EditЉ can be usenumber to a name entry t

phonebook. For example, the ecellular and a home numbeDoe’s” work number later usfeature.

Delete uconnect Phoneboo

NOTE: Editing phonebookwhen the vehicle is not in mo


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt aЉPhonebook Delete.Љ

• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you willthen be asked for the name of the entry that you wisht d l t Y ith th f h b k

Delete/Erase “All” uconnec








to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebookentry that you wish to delete or you can say ЉListNamesЉ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebookfrom which you choose. To select one of the entriesfrom the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION buttonwhile the uconnect phone is playing the desired entryand say ЉDelete.Љ

• After you enter the name, the uconnect phone willask you which designation you wish to delete: home,work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation youwish to delete.

• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current

language is deleted.

• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot bedeleted or edited.

• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt aЉPhonebook Erase All.Љ

• The uconnect phone will

wish to delete all the entrie

• After confirmation, the pdeleted.

• Note that only the phonebois deleted.

• Automatic downloaded phdeleted or edited.

List All Names in the ucon


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, sayЉPhonebook List Names.Љ

cellular service plan. For examplan provides three-way calaccessed through the uconnec







• The uconnect phone will play the names of all thephonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-

book entries, if available.

• To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICERECOGNITION button during the playing of thedesired name, and say ЉCall.Љ

NOTE: The user can also exercise ЉEditЉ or ЉDeleteЉ

operations at this point.

• The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to thenumber designation you wish to call.

• The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call FeaturesThe following features can be accessed through theuconnect phone if the feature(s) are available on your

accessed through the uconneccellular service provider for t

Answer or Reject an IncomCurrently in Progress

When you receive a call onuconnect phone will interrupif on, and will ask if you wouPress the PHONE button to acall, press and hold the PHONsingle beep, indicating thatrejected.

Answer or Reject an Incom

Currently in ProgressIf a call is currently in progrincoming call, you will hear tcall waiting that you norma

cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place thecurrent call on hold and answer the incoming call.

Place/Retrieve a Call From To put a call on hold, press thhear a single beep This indica







NOTE: The uconnect phone compatible phones in themarket today do not support rejecting an incoming callwhen another call is in progress. Therefore, the user canonly answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Making a Second Call While Current Call is inProgressTo make a second call while you are currently on a call,press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ЉDialЉ

or ЉCallЉ followed by the phone number or phonebookentry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold whilethe second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,refer to ЉToggling Between CallsЉ in this section. To

combine two calls, refer to ЉConference CallЉ in thissection.

hear a single beep. This indicaTo bring the call back from PHONE button until you hea

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (onpress the PHONE button untindicating that the active and have switched. Only one call time.

Conference CallWhen two calls are in progrehold), press and hold the PHO

a double beep indicating tha joined into one conference cal

Three-Way CallingTo initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOG-NITION button while a call is in progress and make a

• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt aЉRedial.Љ







NITION button while a call is in progress, and make asecond phone call, as described under ЉMaking a SecondCall While Current Call is in Progress.Љ After the secondcall has established, press and hold the PHONE buttonuntil you hear a double beep, indicating that the two callshave been joined into one conference call.

Call TerminationTo end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE

button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call onhold may not become active automatically. This is cellphone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, pressand hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.

Redial


• The uconnect phone willwas dialed from your cellu

NOTE: This may not be the luconnect phone.

Call ContinuationCall continuation is the progreuconnect phone after the vehswitched to OFF. Call continable on the vehicle can be any

• After the ignition key is swcontinue on the uconnect

ends, or until the vehicle bcessation of the call on ttransfer of the call to the ce

• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call cancontinue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura-tion after which the call is automatically transferred

• Continue to follow the systhe language selection.







tion, after which the call is automatically transferredfrom the uconnect phone to the cellular phone.

• An active call is automatically transferred to thecellular phone after the ignition key is switched to

OFF.uconnect phone Features

Language SelectionTo change the language that the uconnect phone isusing:


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, saythe name of the language you wish to switch toEnglish, Espanol, or Francais.

After selecting one of the lanvoice commands will be in th

NOTE: After every uconnecoperation, only the language

book is usable. The paired phspecific and usable across all

Emergency AssistanceIf you are in an emergency reachable:

• Pick up the phone and manumber for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone isoperational, you may reach the emergency number asfollows:

• If supported, this number some systems. To do this,and say ‘Setup’, followed b







follows:


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, sayЉEmergencyЉ and the uconnect phone will instructthe paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-

ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, andMexico.

NOTE:• The emergency number dialed is based on the country

where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. andCanada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed maynot be applicable with the available cellular serviceand area.

and say Setup , followed b

• The uconnect phone does sof successfully making a pcell phone directly.

WARN

Your phone must be turneuconnect phone to allow uin emergency situations, wnetwork coverage and staysphone.

Towing AssistanceIf you need towing assistance:

P h PHONE b b i

PagingTo learn how to page, refer toSystems.Љ Paging works prop








• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, sayЉTowing Assistance.Љ

NOTE:• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the

country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outsideMexico City in Mexico).

• If supported, this number may be programmable onsome systems. To do this, press the PHONE button

and say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.

Systems. Paging works propcertain companies, which timwork properly with the uconn

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your vowith Automated Systems.Љ

Working with Automated SThis method is used in instancto press numbers on the cellnavigating through an autom

You can use your uconnect psystem or an automated servicor automated customer servquire immediate response sethat may be too quick for use

When calling a number with your uconnect phone thatnormally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequenceon your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE

send the corresponding phonthe phonebook entry, as tones

NOTE







y p yp , y pRECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wishto enter, followed by the word ЉSend.Љ For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 46 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION buttonand say, Љ3 7 4 6 # Send.Љ Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ЉSend,Љ is also to be used fornavigating through an automated customer service cen-ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.

You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries astones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pagerentries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish tocall and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION buttonand say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter thename or number and say the name of the phonebookentry you wish to send. The uconnect phone will then

NOTE:• You may not hear all of the

network configurations. Th

• Some paging and voice maiout settings that are too shuse of this feature.

Barge In - Overriding PromThe “Voice Recognition” butwish to skip part of a promrecognition command immeprompt is asking ЉWould youa...,Љ you could press the VOICand say, ЉPair a PhoneЉ to shaving to listen to the rest of

Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFFTurning confirmation prompts off will stop the systemfrom confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect phone

Dialing Using the Cellular You can dial a phone numberkeypad and still use the uconn







g y ( g , pwill not repeat a phone number before you dial it).


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉSetup Confirmations.Љ The uconnect phone will playthe current confirmation prompt status and you will

be given the choice to change it.

Phone and Network Status IndicatorsIf available on the radio and/or on a premium displaysuch as the instrument panel cluster, and supported byyour cellular phone, the uconnect phone will providenotification to inform you of your phone and networkstatus when you are attempting to make a phone callusing uconnect phone. The status is given for roaming,network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

ypvia the cellular phone keypacaution and take precautiondialing a number with your phone, the audio will be playaudio system. The uconnect

as if you dial the number usin

NOTE: Certain brands of cethe dial ring to the uconnectvehicle audio system, so you situation, after successfully dmay feel that the call did not gcall is in progress. Once yourhear the audio.

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)When you mute the uconnect phone, you will still beable to hear the conversation coming from the other

uconnect phone or vice verOGNITION button and say ЉT

Connect or Disconnect Link







gparty, but the other party will not be able to hear you. Inorder to mute the uconnect phone:

• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.

• Following the beep, say ЉMute.Љ

In order to un-mute the uconnect phone:

• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.

• Following the beep, say ЉMute off.Љ

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call to and from Cellular PhoneThe uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phonewithout terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing callfrom your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the

Connect or Disconnect Linkuconnect phone and CelluYour cellular phone can be pelectronic devices, but can on

with one electronic device at If you would like to connect orconnection between a uconnephone and the uconnect phodescribed in your cellular pho

List Paired Cellular Phone


• After the “Ready” prompt a“Setup Phone Pairing.”

• When prompted, say ЉList

• The uconnect phone will play the phone names of allpaired cellular phones in order from the highest to thelowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone

• The selected phone will bcall. If the selected phouconnect phone will ret







p y p p being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the nexttwo sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-lete” a paired phone.

Select Another Cellular PhoneThis feature allows you to select and start using anotherphone paired with the uconnect phone.


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, sayЉSetup Select PhoneЉ and follow the prompts.

•

You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION buttonat any time while the list is being played, and thenchoose the phone that you wish to select.

ppriority phone present inwithin 30 ft (9 m)) the vehi

Delete uconnect phone Pa


• After the ЉReadyЉ prompt aЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ

• At the next prompt, sayprompts.

• You can also press the VOICat any time while the list choose the phone you wish

Things You Should Know About Your uconnectphone

uconnect phone Tutorial

Repeat the words and phrasuconnect phone. For best rsession should be completed w







uconnect phone TutorialTo hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press thePHONE button and say “uconnect Tutorial.”

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-nizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect

phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter thistraining mode, follow one of the two following proce-dures:

From outside the uconnect phone mode (e.g., from radiomode):

•

Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button forfive seconds until the session begins, or,

• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say theЉSetup, Voice TrainingЉ command.

with the engine running, all blower fan switched off.

This procedure may be repea

system will adapt to the last tTo restore the Voice Recognitiosettings, enter the Voice Trainprocedure and follow the pro

Voice Recognition (VR)

• For best performance, adjuprovide at least 1 ⁄ 2 in (1 cm)

console (if equipped) and t• Always wait for the beep b

• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldspeak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away fromyou.

• When navigating through as voice mail, or when senspeaking the digit string, m







• Make sure that no one other than you is speakingduring a voice recognition period.

• Performance is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,

•

dry weather condition.• Even though the system is designed for users speaking

in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-cents, the system may not always work for some.

• Storing names in the phonnot in motion is recommen

• It is not recommended t

names in the uconnect ph

• Phonebook (Downloaded aname recognition rate is oare not similar.

• You can say ЉOЉ (letter ЉOЉ) spoken Љeight-zero-zero.Љ

• Even though international

combinations is supportenumber combinations may

• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may becompromised with the convertible top down.

Far End Audio Performance

• Echo at the far end can slowering the in-vehicle aud

• In a convertible vehicle, sy







Far End Audio Performance

• Audio quality is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,

• dry weather conditions, and

• operation from the driver’s seat.

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudnessto a large degree rely on the phone and network, andnot the uconnect phone.

In a convertible vehicle, sycompromised with the con

Bluetooth CommunicationCellular phones have been fo

the uconnect phone. When thcan generally be reestablisheoff/on. Your cellular phone is Bluetooth ON mode.

Power-UpAfter switching the ignition kON or ACC position, or aftemust wait at least five second



















Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s)

zero

Voice Com

Primary A

call







one

two

three

fourfive

six

seven

eight

nine

star (*)

plus (+)pound (#)

add location

all

cancel

confirmation prompts

continue

deletedial

download

edit

emergency

English

erase all

EspanolFrancais

help

home

Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s)

language

Voice Com

Primary A

return to main menu r







g g

list names

list phones

mobile

mutemute off

new entry

no

pager

pair a phone

phone pairing pairing

phonebook phone bookprevious

record again

redial

select phone s

send

set up p

stowing assistance

transfer call

uconnect Tutorial

try again

voice training

work

yes

General InformationThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSEQUIPPED

Voice Recognition System







following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This Voice Recognicontrol your AM, FMplayer, and a memo

NOTE: Take care to speakSystem as calmly and normallthe Voice Interface System to mands may be negatively afferaised voice level.

WARN

Any voice commanded systin safe driving conditions ankept on the roadway ahearesult in an accident causing

When you press the VR button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few

These commands are universamenu. All other commands cathe active application.







seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.

If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists

options, press the VR button, listen for the beep, and sayyour command.

Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking isknown as “barging in.” The system will be interruptedand after the beep you can add or change commands.This will become helpful once you start to learn theoptions.

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,“Help”, or “Main Menu”.

For example, if you are in thlistening to FM radio, you candisc menu or from the FM rad

When using this system, you sa normal speaking volume.

The system will best recognidows are closed, and the heaset to low.

At any point, if the system doecommands, you will be prom

To hear the first available Mensay “Help” or “Main Menu”.

CommandsThe Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are available at alltimes. Local commands are available if the supported

In this mode, you can say the

• “Radio” (to switch to the ra

• “Disc” (to switch to the dis







times. Local commands are available if the supportedradio mode is active.

Changing the Volume

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button.

2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust thevolume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni-tion system is speaking. Please note the volume settingfor VR is different than the audio system.

Main Menu

Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button. You may say“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.

Disc (to switch to the dis

• “Memo” (to switch to the m

• “System Setup” (to switch

Radio AM (or Radio Long WWave — If Equipped)To switch to the AM band saythis mode, you may say the fo

• “Frequency” (to change the

• “Next Station” (to select th

•

“Previous Station” (to selec• “Radio Menu” (to switch t

• “Main Menu” (to switch to

Radio FMTo switch to the FM band say “FM” or “Radio FM”. Inthis mode, you may say the following commands:

“F ” ( h h f )

• “Previous Channel” (to sel

• “List Channel” (to hear a li

• “Select Name” (to say the n







• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)

• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Satellite RadioTo switch to satellite radio mode say “Sat” or “SatelliteRadio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-mands:

• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by itsspoken number)

• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)

Select Name (to say the n

• “Radio Menu” (to switch t


DiscTo switch to the disc mode saymay say the following comma

• “Track” (#) (to change the t

• “Next Track” (to play the n

• “Previous Track” (to play t


MemoTo switch to the voice recorder mode say “Memo”. In thismode, you may say the following commands:

“N M ” (t d ) D i th

− “Previous” (to play the p

− “Delete” (to delete a mem

• “Delete All” (to delete all m







• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During therecording you may press the VR button to stop record-ing. You proceed by saying one of the followingcommands:

− “Save” (to save the memo)

− “Continue” (to continue recording)

− “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)— During the playback you may press the VR buttonto stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of

the following commands:

− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)

− “Next” (to play the next memo)

(

System SetupTo switch to system setup say may say the following comma

• “Language German”

• “Language Dutch”

• “Language Italian”

• “Language English”

• “Language French”

• “Language Spanish”

• “Tutorial”

• “Voice Training”

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the“Barge In” commands.

Voice Training

SEATS

Front Manual Seat Adjustm

Move the seat forward or rearbar Lift up on the bar located







Voice TrainingFor users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-nizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect

phone Voice Training feature may be used.

1. Press the VR button, say “System Setup” and once youare in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will trainyour own voice to the system and will improve recogni-tion.

2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted byuconnect phone. For best results, the Voice Trainingsession should be completed when the vehicle is parked,

engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fanswitched off. This procedure may be repeated with a newuser. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

bar. Lift up on the bar located the floor. Position the seat andfully.

WARN

Adjusting a seat while thdangerous. The sudden mocause you to lose control. Thproperly adjusted and you any seat only while the veh

Front Seat Adjustment — ReclineTo adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on theoutboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the leverat the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the

WARNING! (

• Do not allow people to vehicle that is not equipb l







plever, lean forward, and release the lever.

WARNING!

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that theseat belt is no longer resting against your chest. Ina collision, you could slide under the seat belt andbe seriously or even fatally injured. Use the re-cliner only when the vehicle is parked.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

(Continued)

belts.

• Be sure everyone in youusing a seat belt properly

Manual Lumbar Support A

The manual lumbar support aon the right side of the driverthe left side of the passenger’sthe lumbar control lever foincrease or decrease the lumb







Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat

The driver’s power seat switches are located on theoutboard side of the driver’s seat lower side trim. The

bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward,and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatbackrecline adjustment.

Four-Way Passenger’s Pow

The front passenger’s power sthe outboard side of the passeThe bottom switch controls ment. The top switch controls ment.

Manual Lumbar Control Power Seat

NOTE: The four-way seat does not have an up/downadjustment.

Head Restraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in







Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury inthe event of impact from the rear. Adjustable headrestraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is asHigh as practical. The head restraints have a locking

button which must be pushed in to lower the headrestraint to all positions. The restraints may be raisedwithout pushing in the button.

Front Heated Seats — If Eq

The front driver and passencontrols for each heater arecenter of the instrument paconditioning controls). The haverage heat level for both the

Adjustable Hea

After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from aHigh or Low heat setting. Illuminated LEDs on eachswitch indicate the level of heat in use.

Press the switch once to select High-level heat-

two to one, indicating the chawill turn Off automatically afutes.

NOTE: Once a heat setting i







Press the switch once to select High level heating. Press the switch a second time to selectLow-level heating. Press the switch a third timeto shut the heating elements Off. Two indica-

tors will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none forOff.

When the High-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the first four minutesof operation. Then, the heat output will drop to thenormal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected,the system will automatically switch to Low-level afterapproximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. Atthat time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from

NOTE: Once a heat setting iwithin two to five minutes.

WARN

• Persons who are unablebecause of advanced age,spinal cord injury, medhaustion or other physicacare when using the seat heven at Low temperaturelong periods of time.


• Do not place anything on the seat that insulatesagainst heat, such as a blanket or cushion. Thismay cause the seat heater to overheat To avoid







may cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoidheated seat surfaces coming in contact with eachother and potential seat overheating, ALWAYS

ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position(amber lights indicate High/Low/Off) before plac-ing any of the seats into a folded flat position (ifequipped).

Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped

On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seatsclosest to the doors are heated. The controls for theseseats are located on the rear of the center console.

Press the switch oncing. Press the switcLow-level heating. Pto shut the heating

tors will illuminate for High, Off.

Rear Heated Se

When the High-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the first four minutesof operation. Then, the heat output will drop to thenormal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected,th t ill t ti ll it h t L l l ft

WARN

• Persons who are unablebecause of advanced age,

i l d i j d







the system will automatically switch to Low-level afterapproximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. Atthat time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from

two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level settingwill turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min-utes.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be feltwithin two to five minutes.

spinal cord injury, medhaustion or other physicacare when using the seat h

even at Low temperaturelong periods of time.

• Do not place anything oagainst heat, such as a bmay cause the seat heateheated seat surfaces comother and potential seat sure that the seat heate

(amber lights indicate Hiing any of the seats into equipped).

60/40 Split Rear Seat

To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow forextended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating







g p groom.

NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and

positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback tofold down easily.

1. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle)to release.

NOTE: Do not fold the rearseat belt buckled.

2. Fold the rear seat complete

Rear Seat R

WARN

The cargo area in the rear of seatbacks in the locked-up o

h ld t b d l







To Raise Rear Seat Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interfer-ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fullylocking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to itsproper position.

should not be used as a plathe vehicle is in motion. Tinjured in an accident. Ch

and using the proper restrai

Folding Rear Seat

Storage (Rear Seat Armrest) — If EquippedThe rear seat may be equipped with a center storagearmrest.







Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access thestorage bin.

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT —

Once programmed, the memodriver’s door panel can be usedriver’s outside mirror, adjuspedals, and radio station pre

Rear Seat Armrest

Armrest Stor

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro-grammed to recall the same positions when the UN-LOCK button is pressed.

position. The memory systemfour RKE transmitters, each two memory positions.

Setting Memory Positions







Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. Oneor both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory

Keyless Entry (RKE) Trans

NOTE: Each time the S (SET

button 1 or 2 are pressed, youfor that button and store a ne

1. Insert the ignition key, andthe ON position.

2. Press the driver door memoare setting the memory for drif you are setting the memorwill recall any stored settingcomplete the memory recall b

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recmirror to the desired position

Driver Memory Switches

4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desiredpositions.

5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (upto 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).

11. Select ЉRemote Linked to Vehicle Information Center (Eto “Electronic Vehicle InformCustomer-Programmable Featinformation







6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position andremove the key.

7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on thedriver’s door.

8. Within five seconds, press and release memory button1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must beperformed within five seconds if you desire to also use aRKE transmitter to recall memory positions.

9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE

transmitters.10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch tothe ON position.

information.

12. Repeat the above steps position, using the other numb

link another RKE transmitter

Memory Position Recall

NOTE: The vehicle must be positions. If a recall is attempin PARK, a message will be dVehicle Information Center (E

To recall the memory settin

memory button number 1 onUNLOCK button on the Rmemory position 1.

To recall the memory setting for driver two, pressmemory button number 2 on the driver’s door, or theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked tomemory position 2.

3. Press and release the memoon the driver’s door.

4. Within five seconds, press a1 on the driver’s door.







A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s

mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of onesecond will occur before another recall can be selected.

To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, andremove the key.

2. Press and release memory button number 1. Thesystem will recall any memory settings stored in position

1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.

5. Within five seconds, press button on the RKE transmitte

To disable another RKE tramemory position, repeat steptransmitter.

NOTE: Once programmed, ato memory can be easily enabRefer to Remote Linked to MVehicle Information CenterProgrammable FeaturesЉ in

information.

Easy Entry/Exit SeatThis feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioningwhich will enhance driver mobility out of and into thevehicle.

Th ibl E E /E i dj

driving position when thignition, and turned out of the ACC/ON position.

The Easy Entry/Exit feature bl d if h i l d







There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustmentsavailable:

•

The seat cushion will move rearward approximately2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat isgreater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of therear seat stop when the key is removed from theignition switch. The seat will then move forwardapproximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placedinto the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.

• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in

(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting positionis between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of therear stop when the key is removed from the ignitionswitch. The seat will move forward to the memory/

abled if the seat is already po(23 mm) forward of the rear sis no benefit to the driver by

Exit/Entry.

Each stored memory setting wEntry/Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exwhen the vehicle is delivered Entry/Exit feature is enabled the programmable features

Information Center (EVIC). RInformation Center (EVIC) —FeaturesЉ in Section 4 for mor

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOODTo open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the release lever located below the instrumentpanel and in front of the driver’s door.







2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left,and lift the hood.

CAUTI

To prevent possible damage

close it. Use a firm downwathe hood to ensure that both

Hood Release

Safety Latch

WARNING!

If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up whenthe vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before

Headlights and Parking LigTurn the end of the multifuncfor parking light operation. Tuheadlight operation. Turn to headlight operation (if equipp







Be sure all hood latches are fully latched beforedriving.

LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of theheadlights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instru-ment panel light dimming, passing light, interiorcourtesy/dome lights, and optional fog lights. The mul-tifunction lever is located on the left side of the steeringwheel.

g p ( q pp

Headlight

Automatic Headlight System — If EquippedTurn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detentto activate the automatic headlight system.

This system performs two functions. With the enginerunning and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi

If your vehicle is equipped wiSystem” and it is activated, thcally turn on after the wiperswithin approximately one minapproximately four minutes a







running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi-tion, the headlights will turn on and off based on thesurrounding light levels.

Headlights On Automatically With WipersIf your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, italso has this customer programmable feature. When yourheadlights are in the automatic mode and the engine isrunning, they will automatically turn on when the wipersystem is on.

pp ystop. Refer to “Windshield Wsection.

NOTE: When your headligdaytime, the instrument panedim to the lower nighttime iment Panel and Interior Lighment panel lights to full dayt

SmartBeams — If EquippedThe SmartBeam system provides increased forward light-ing at night by automating high beam control throughthe use of a digital camera mounted on the insiderearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light

To Activate

1. Select “Auto Headlamp LoHigh Beam.” Refer to “EVIC —Features” in Section 4 of this m







p gand automatically switches from high beams to low

beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is re-placed, the SmartBeam mirror must be re-aimed toensure proper performance. See your local authorizeddealer.

2. Turn the end of the multifuheadlight position.

3. Push the multifunction levfront of vehicle) to engage the

NOTE: This system will not at or above 20 mph (32 km/h

To Deactivate

1. Pull back on the multifunction lever to manuallydeactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).

2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to

Daytime Running Lights —The high beam headlights colevel whenever the engine is rsion is not in the PARK position until the ignition switch is







reactivate the system.

NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and

taillights of vehicles in the field of view will causeheadlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause thesystem to function improperly.

the parking brake is engaged. be used for normal nighttime

Automatic Headlight LevelOnlyThis feature prevents the hwith the vision of oncoming dautomatically adjusts the heigreaction to changes in vehicle

Instrument Panel and Interior LightsWhen the multifunction lever is in the parking light,headlight, or AUTO position (if equipped), rotating thecenter portion of the lever up and down will increase anddecrease the brightness (dimmer control) of the instru-







ment panel lights. Full daytime brightness on all elec-tronic displays (odometer, overhead console, radio, and

Automatic Climate Control (if equipped) is obtained byrotating the center portion of the control to the firstdetent above the dimmer range. Rotating the control tothe second detent above the dimmer range turns theinterior lights on. Rotating the control to the “Off”(extreme bottom) position disables all the interior lights,even when the doors and liftgate are open. While in the“Off” position the instrument panel lighting is at thelowest light level and may not be suitable for night

driving.

Dimmer C

Battery Saver FeatureIf the multifunction lever is left in the interior lightposition, parking light position, or the headlight positionwhen the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position,the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the

turn lights, low beam headlighpull out the end of the multifuinstrument cluster shows whe







exterior and interior lights after eight minutes. Normaloperation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or

when the headlight switch is turned to another position.Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignitionswitch has been turned to LOCK/ACC, a chime willsound when the driver’s door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The fog light switch is located in the multifunctionlever. To activate the fog lights, turn on the park/ Front Fog Lig

NOTE:• Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog

lights.

• A front fog light is a lighting device that providesillumination in front of the vehicle under conditions of







illumination in front of the vehicle under conditions of fog, rain, snow, or dust. The front fog lights supple-ment the lower beam of a standard headlight system.

• Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lightsshould be made to prevent excessive glare for otherdrivers.

Turn SignalsMove the multifunction lever up or down, and thearrows on each side of the instrument cluster will flash toshow proper operation of the left and right turn signal

lights. You can signal a lane change by moving themultifunction lever partially up or down.

Turn Signal Auto-ModeTap the multifunction lever onor right) will flash three times

Turn Signal

High Beam SwitchPush the multifunction lever away from you to switchthe headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction levertowards you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-to-PassYou can signal another vehimultifunction lever toward thcause the high beam headlightuntil the lever is released.







Headlight Time Delay

This feature delays turning of

or 90 seconds after the ignitioactivate the headlight delay, th

be rotated to the “Off” positiois turned to LOCK/ACC. Onminate during this time. ReInformation Center (EVIC) –Features” in Section 4 to turn tthe time interval.

Interior LightsThe interior lighting consists oinstrument panel), an overh

High Beam/Low Beam Select

contains both driver and passenger reading lights), read-ing lights (located above the rear doors), and a rear cargolight. Opening a door, pressing the UNLOCK button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or turningthe center of the multifunction control lever to the

t iti ill ti t ll i t i t







extreme up position, will activate all interior courtesylights.

Front Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Eachlight can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of thelens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of thelens a second time. There are also reading lights locatedabove the rear doors. Each light can be turned on bypressing the front recessed area of the lens. To turn theselights off, press the recessed area of the lens a second

time.

Front Map/Rea

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERSThe front and rear wipers and washers are operated by aswitch in the right side control lever. Turn the end of thecontrol lever to select Low, High, or one of the five speedsensitive intermittent windshield wiper speeds. Refer to“Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System” in this







“Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System” in thissection. For information on the rear wiper and washer,refer to “Rear Window Features” in this section.

NOTE: Always remove any vents the windshield wiper bloff position. If the windshield

and the blades cannot return tto the wiper motor may occur

Windshield Wiper

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and holdwhile spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in thedelay range, the wiper will operate for several secondsafter the lever is released, and then resume the intermit-tent interval previously selected.

MistUse the Mist feature when occasional usage of the wipersrelease the control lever for a

Speed Sensitive Intermitte







If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wiperswill operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshieldcould lead to an accident. You might not see othervehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing ofthe windshield during freezing weather, warm thewindshield with the defroster before and duringwindshield washer use.

Use one of the five intermiweather conditions make a s

variable pause between cyclesthe lever to one of the five deladelay interval. The delay can mum of approximately 18 seccycle every 1/2 second.

NOTE: The wiper delay timeIf the vehicle is moving lessdelay times will be doubled.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedThis feature senses moisture on the windshield andautomatically activates the wipers for the driver. Thefeature is especially useful for road splash or oversprayfrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotatethe end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings

• The rain sensing feature mwhen ice, or dried salt watshield.

• Use of Rain-X or productsmay reduce rain sensor per







the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settingsto activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with themultifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the leastsensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi-tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires lesswiper sensitivity. Settings 4 and 5 can be used if thedriver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch inthe OFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:• The rain sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper switch is in the Low or High speed position.

• A customer programmablVehicle Information CenteSense feature to be turnedVehicle Information CentProgrammable Features” in

The rain sensing system has wiper blades and arms, and wfollowing conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperatur

first turned ON, the rain

operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speedis greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When theignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-







TRAL position, the rain sensing system will not oper-ate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is

greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever ismoved out of the NEUTRAL position.

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMNThis feature allows you to tilt the steering columnupward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen orshorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping controlhandle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

To unlock the steering columdownward (toward the floor).move the steering wheel upw

sired. To lengthen or shorten

Tilt Steering

the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.To lock the steering column in position, push the controlhandle upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

adjusted without compromisactuating the pedals.







Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Thetelescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-

ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving ordriving without the telescoping adjustment lockedcould cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedalsto move toward or away from the driver to provideimproved position with the steering wheel. The adjust-

able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be

Press the bottom of the sw

forward (away from the drive

Adjustable Pe

Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward(toward the driver).

• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.

Th d l b dj d h h hi l i i

CAUTI

Do not place any article undor impede its ability to movto the pedal controls. Pedalited if movement is stopped







• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R) or when the Electronic Speed Control is

ON. A message will be displayed in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) if the pedals areattempted to be adjusted when the system is lockedout (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise ControlEngaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle InReverse”). Refer to Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) in Section 4 for more information.

ited if movement is stoppedadjustable pedal’s path.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CON

When engaged, Electronic Saccelerator operations at spe(40 km/h) for 3.7L, 4.7L, and(23 km/h) for 3.0L diesel eng

The Electronic Speed Control lside of the steering wheel.

WARN

Leaving the Electronic Spwhen not in use is dangerouset the system or cause it to You could lose control and h







To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light inthe instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system

off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CruiseIndicator Light will turn off. The system should beturned off when not in use.

You could lose control and hleave the system OFF when

To Set At A Desired SpeedWhen the vehicle has reacheddown on the lever and releasand the vehicle will operate a

NOTE: The vehicle shouldspeed and on level ground bef

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedSpeed Control lever toward ysure while slowing the vehicl

Electronic Speed Control Lever

Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignitionswitch OFF erases the set speed memory.

To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, push the RESUMEACCEL l d l R b d t

that tapping the lever three tim3 mph (5 km/h) (3.7L, 4.7L,gines).

To decrease speed while Electpush down and hold SET DECth d i d d i h d







ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at anyspeed above 20 mph (32 km/h) for 3.7L, 4.7L, and 5.7L

engines, and 14 mph (23 km/h) for 3.0L diesel engines.To Vary The Speed Setting

When the Electronic Speed Control is on, speed can beincreased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL.Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, andthe new speed will be set.

Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph(2 km/h) (3.7L, 4.7L, 5.7L, and 3.0L diesel engines) speedincrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed increases so

the desired speed is reached, set.

Tapping the SET DECEL lever(2 km/h) speed decrease. Eacspeed decreases.

NOTE: The Electronic Speeddesigned to shut down if mufunctions are operated simultaproper operation. If this ocreactivated by pushing the switch ON/OFF button and reSET speed.

To Accelerate For PassingPress the accelerator as you would normally. When thepedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On HillsThe transmission may downshift on hills to maintain thevehicle set speed

Section and Note Section forand recommendations.

The Rear Park Assist will rem(enabled or disabled) from ththe ignition is changed to the







vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change onmoderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur soit may be preferable to drive without Electronic SpeedControl.

REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPEDThe Rear Park Assist provides visible and audible indi-

cations of the distance between the rear fascia and thedetected obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning

The Rear Park Assist can be alever is in REVERSE. If the Re

this shift lever position, the sysvehicle speed is increased t(18 km/h) or above. The systemvehicle speed is decreased tomately 10 mph (16 km/h).

Rear Park Assist Sensors

The four Rear Park Assist Sefascia, monitor the area behinthe sensors’ field of view.

The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12to 59 in (30 to 150 cm) from the rear fascia in thehorizontal direction, depending on the location andorientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle.

Rear Park Assist Warning DisplayThe Rear Park Assist Warning Display located in the







The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in theheadliner near the flipper glass, provides both visible and

audible warnings to indicate the distance between therear fascia and the detected obstacle.

When the ignition is turnedwarning display will turn ONone second. Each side of theyellow and two red LEDs. T

obstacle when the red LED is

The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellowLEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. Thefollowing chart shows the warning display operationwhen the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES

DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR







DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR

REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER

1st LED 59 in (150 cm) Yellow 2nd LED 51 in (130 cm) Yellow

3rd LED 45 in (115 cm) Yellow

4th LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39 in (100 cm) Yellow

5th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow

6th LED 20 in (50 cm) 28 in (70 cm) Yellow

7th LED 16 in (40 cm) 20 in (50 cm) Red

8th LED 6 in (15 cm) 12 in (30 cm) Red

NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE theradio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Enable/Disable The Rear Park AssistThe Rear Park Assist can be enabled and disabled with aswitch located on the upper switch bank of the instru-ment panel.

When the switch is pressed instrument cluster will displaABLED” message. Refer to “Etion Center (EVIC)” in Sectionshift lever is changed to REdisabled, the instrument clu







chime, once per ignition cycmessage.

The Rear Park Assist Switch Rear Park Assist is disabled oAssist Switch LED will be enabled.

Service The Rear Park Ass

When the Rear Park Assist iscluster will actuate a single

cycle, and it will display the SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Etion Center (EVIC)” in Section

Rear Park Assist Switch

Cleaning The Rear Park AssistClean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car washsoap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Donot scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you coulddamage the sensors.

REAR CAMERA IF EQUIPPED

WARN

Drivers must be careful wheusing the Rear Camera Sysfully behind your vehicle, pedestrians, animals, other







REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPEDVehicles with a uconnect tunes radio may be equipped

with a rearview camera (located on the rear liftgate) thatallows you to see an on-screen image (on the navigationradio screen) of the rear of your vehicle, whenever thevehicle is put into REVERSE.

blind spots before backingfor the safety of your surro

tinue to pay attention while so can result in serious inju

CAUTI

• To avoid vehicle damage,should only be used as Camera system is unable

object in your drive path

CAUTION! (Continued)

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must bedriven slowly when using the Rear Camera systemto be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.It is recommended that the driver look frequentlyover his/her shoulder when using the Rear Camera

4. Enable or disable the rear cЉenable rear camera in reverse

5. Press the “save” soft key.

6. When the vehicle is shifted the rear of the vehicle will appЉ h k i di Љ d







over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Camerasystem.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up onthe camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and drywith a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Turning the Rear Camera On or Off — With

Navigation Radio

1. Press the ЉmenuЉ hard key.

2. Select Љsystem setupЉ soft key.

3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.

Љcheck entire surroundingsЉ dthe screen. After five seconds

7. When the vehicle is shiftedcamera mode is exited and theappears again.

Turning the Rear Camera ONavigation Radio

1. Press the ЉmenuЉ hard key.

2. Select Љsystem setupЉ soft k3. Enable or disable the rear cЉenable rear camera in reverse

4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note toЉcheck entire surroundingsЉ displayed across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.

5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rearcamera mode is exited and the audio screen appears







ca e a ode s e ted a d t e aud o sc ee appea sagain.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink),storage for sunglasses, and optional power sunroof switches.

Courtesy/Reading Lights

At the forward end of the creading lights.

Press the lens to turn these ligto turn the lights off.

Overhead C

The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door isopened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK

button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.

Sunglasses StorageAt the rear of the console a compartment is provided forthe storage of a pair of sunglasses.

The HomeLink buttons areconsole, and contain one, twonating the different HomeLin







g p g

The storage compartment access is a Љpush/pushЉ design.

Push the finger depression on the overhead console toopen. Push the finger depression to close.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDHomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate devices such as garagedoor openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home securitysystems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s

battery.NOTE: HomeLink is disablrity Alarm is active.

HomeLink

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open and closewhile you are training the Universal Transceiver.Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are inthe path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-

i ith d th t h “ t

Programming HomeLink

Before You BeginIf you have not trained any oerase all channels before you

To do this, press and hold the to 20 seconds The EVIC w







ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stopand reverse” feature as required by federal safety

standards. This includes most garage door openermodels manufactured after 1982. Do not use agarage door opener without these safety features.Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atwww.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-sistance.

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas cancause serious injury or death.

to 20 seconds. The EVIC wCHANNELS.” Release the bu

sage states “CHANNELS CLE

It is recommended that a newhand-held transmitter of the to HomeLink for more effictransmission of the radio-freq

Your vehicle should be parkwhile training.

1. Turn the ignition switch to

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVICdisplay in view.

For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-held transmitter away from the HomeLink.

3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen

NOTE: Some gate operatorsmay require you to replace Stein the “Gate Operator/Canad

4. Press and hold the just-traithe channel has been trained, state “CHANNEL # TRANSM







3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosenHomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button

until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”

Then release both the HomeLink and hand-held trans-mitter buttons.

If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeatStep 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in theoriginal hand-held transmitter.

It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. Thegarage door may open and close while you train.

If the EVIC display still state

ING” repeat Step 3.

NOTE: After training a Hgarage door does not operategarage door opener was mangarage door opener may haveto the heading “Programming

5. PROGRAMMING A ROLL

At the garage door opener mthe “learn” or “training” butt

This can usually be found where the hanging antennawire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it isNOT the button normally used to open and close thedoor).

6. Firmly press and release button. The name and color omanufacturer.

NOTE: There are 30 seconds step after the “Learn” button

7 Return to the vehicle an







7. Return to the vehicle anHomeLink button twice (ho

seconds each time). If the dactivates, programming is com

If the device does not activattime (for two seconds) to com

If you have any problems, orcall toll-free 1–800–355–3515www.HomeLink.com for info

To program the remaining repeat each step for each remerase the channels.

1 — Garage Door Opener2 — Training Button

Gate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough forHomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the same manner

has successfully accepted thEVIC display will change froING” to “CHANNEL # TRAI

If you unplugged the device fat this time.

Then proceed with Step







designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cyclingprocess to prevent possible overheating of the garagedoor or gate motor.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage dooropener or a gate operator, replace “ProgrammingHomeLink” Step 3 with the following:

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink buttonwhile you press and release - every two seconds

(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink

Then proceed with Step HomeLink” earlier in this se

Using HomeLink To operate, simply press andHomeLink button. Activatitrained device (i.e., garage dsecurity system, entry door letc.) The hand-held transmitteused at any time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink ButtonTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #

The HomeLink Universal Trthe Vehicle Security Alarm is

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble progare some of the most common

• Replace the battery in the o







20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL #TRAINING.” Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

SecurityIt is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turnin your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS

CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-vidual channels cannot be erased.

• Replace the battery in the o

•

Press the learn button on tcomplete the training for ro

• Did you unplug the device to plug it back in?

If you are having any probleplease call toll-free 1–800–355www.HomeLink.com for info

General InformationThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and IndustryCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

POWER SUNROOF — IF EThe power sunroof switch isvisors on the overhead consol







2. This device must accept any interference that may bereceived including interference that may cause undesired

operation

NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complieswith FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to operate thedevice.

The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-cations were met.

Power Sunro

WARNING!

• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key inthe ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-tended children, can become entrapped by thepower sunroof while operating the power sunroofswitch. Such entrapment may result in serious

Opening Sunroof — ExprePress the switch rearward anwill open automatically fromwill open fully, then stop au“Express Open”. During Expmovement of the sunroof swi

Cl i S f E







switch. Such entrapment may result in seriousinjury or death.

• In an accident, there is a greater risk of beingthrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. Youcould also be seriously injured or killed. Alwaysfasten your seat belt properly and make sure allpassengers are properly secured too.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sun-roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, orany object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Closing Sunroof — Expres

Press the switch forward andwill close automatically fromwill close fully and stop au“Express Close”. During Expmovement of the switch will

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obsthe sunroof during Express C

struction is detected, the sunrtract. Remove the obstructionthe switch forward and releas

Pinch Protect OverrideIf a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closingthe sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for twoseconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position.

NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch isd

NOTE: The sunshade cannotopen.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be descrpressure on the ears or a helears. Your vehicle may exhib

i d d th







pressed.

Venting Sunroof — ExpressPress and release the ЉVentЉ button, and the sunroof willopen to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,and will occur regardless of sunroof position. DuringExpress Vent operation, any movement of the switch willstop the sunroof.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the

sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

windows down, or the sunroopen or partially open positiorence and can be minimized. Ithe rear windows open, open ttogether to minimize the buffewith the sunroof open, adjuminimize the buffeting or ope

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a nonabrasive cleanthe glass panel.

Ignition Off OperationThe power sunroof switches remain active for up to10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

Sunroof Fully ClosedPress the switch forward and release to ensure that thesunroof is fully closed







sunroof is fully closed.

POWER OUTLETS

Front Power OutletTo the left and right of the convenience tray (lower centerof instrument panel) is an outlet for electric-poweredaccessories. Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover toaccess the outlet.

Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped

The rear power outlet (if equipped) is located in the leftrear cargo area.

The rear power outlet is a direcwill receive power whether thLOCK position. All accessorishould be removed or turned in use to protect the battery a

Rear Powe

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not use a three-prong adapter.

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving

CAUTI

• Many accessories that cpower from the vehicle’s buse (i.e., cellular phonplugged in long enough, discharge sufficiently t







• Close the lid when not in use and while drivingthe vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause anelectric shock and failure.

g yand/or prevent engine sta

• Accessories that draw hivacuum cleaners, lights,battery even more quickmittently and with greate

• After the use of high polong periods of the vehiclaccessories still pluggeddriven a sufficient leng

generator to recharge the

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPEDThere is a 115-Volt, 150-Watt inverter outlet located on the

back of the center console to convert DC current to ACcurrent.

This outlet can power cellulaother low power devices reWatts. Certain high-end videtion3 and XBox360 will exceemost power tools. Due to builtpower outlet will shut dowexceeded. Each device to be p







first to make sure it does not ex

maximum rating.

Power Inverter

Press the power inverter switch (located on the upperswitch bank) to turn the power on to the outlet. Press theswitch again to turn the power off.

NOTE:• When the power inverter sw

be a delay of approximateinverter status indicator tutor of the AC power inverinverter is producing AC p

• Due to built-in overload p







• Due to built-in overload pshut down if the power rat

WARN

To avoid serious injury or d

• Do not use a three-prong

• Do not insert any objects

• Do not touch with wet ha

• Close the lid when not in

• If this outlet is mishandleshock and failure.

Power Inverter Switch

CUPHOLDERSIn the center console, there are two cupholders for thefront seat passengers.







The rear passengers have access to two cupholders thatpull out from the lower center of the rear seat.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Light

The cargo area light is activat

opening any door, or by rotatthe multifunction lever to the doors are closed and only the l

Front Cupholders

Rear Cuph

the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lamps.Push on the lens surface a second time to restore theinterior lights to normal operation.

Rear Storage CompartmentThe rear storage compartment is located on the driver’sside behind the second row seat.

Retractable Cargo Area Co

NOTE: The purpose of this csecure loads. It will not prevprotect passengers from loose

To cover the cargo area:

1. Grasp the cover at the cent







1. Grasp the cover at the centcargo area.

2. Insert the pins on the ends othe pillar trim cover.

3. The liftgate may be openeplace.

Rear Storage Compartment

WARN

In an accident, a loose carcould cause injury. It couldstop and strike someone in the cargo cover on the cargocompartment. Remove the

h k f i







when taken from its moun

vehicle.

Rear Cargo Cover

Cargo Tie-Down HooksThe tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should beused to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving.

WARN

• To help protect against peshould not be seated in rear cargo space is intepurposes only, not for pain seats and use seat belt

C i d h k







• Cargo tie-down hooks ar

child seat tether strap. Insion, a hook could pull lseat to come loose. A childUse only the anchors ptethers.

The weight and positioncan change the vehicle chicle handling. To avoid

in personal injury, folloloading your vehicle:

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks


• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limitsdescribed on the label attached to the left door orleft door center pillar.

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Putheavier objects as low and as far forward aspossible

Cargo Load Floor

The panel in the load floor is rOne side is carpeted and the olined tray which holds a varie







possible.

•

Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rearaxle. Too much weight or improperly placedweight over or behind the rear axle can cause therear of the vehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top ofthe seatback. This could impair visibility or be-come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop orcollision.

Cargo Loa

The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. Inorder to use the cargo load floor, use the followingprocedure:

NOTE: The cargo load floor latches should not beused as cargo tie-downs.

1. Flip up pull loop(s) so they are perpendicular (straightup) to the top surface of the tray

REAR WINDOW FEATURE

Rear Window Wiper/Washe

A switch on the right side of thoperation of the rear wiper/the center of the switch forwactivate the wiper. The rear wmittent mode only. Rotating







up) to the top surface of the tray.

2. Pull up on loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they areparallel to the slotted hole in tray.

3. Lift the tray over the loop(s), and reposition the tray.

4. Pull up on the loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they areperpendicular (straight up) to the slotted hole in tray.

5. Push the loop(s) back down, so they are parallel to thetop of the tray.

y gthe way forward will turn o

wash pump will continue to opis pressed. Upon release, the w

before returning to the set po

If the liftgate flipper glass is owindow wiper is interrupted prear wiper blade. When the liftthe rear wiper switch, or the iturned OFF and ON to restart

Rear Window Defroster

Press this button (locat







If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turnedOFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door; if this

happens, the rear wiper will stop at its current positionand will not go to “Park”.

panel) to turn on the r

the heated side mirrors (if e button will illuminate to indfroster is on. The defroster auabout 10 minutes of operationWindshield Wiper/Washer Switch

CAUTION!

• To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of therear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive window cleaners on theinterior surface of the window.

• Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warmwater

Distribute cargo weight evenlyThe roof rack does not increacapacity of the vehicle. Be suinside the vehicle plus that onexceed the maximum vehicle

The optional crossbars must borientation (the longer crossb







water.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPEDThe crossbars and siderails are designed to carry theweight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. Theload must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should beuniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorizeddealer can order and install Mopar crossbars built

specifically for this roof rack system.

The optional crossbars must aseven detent positions marksiderails to prevent movemenloosen the thumb screws loceach crossbar approximately crossbar to the desired positiparallel to the rack frame. Onthe seven detent positions, retlock the crossbar into position

NOTE:• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not

in use, place the front crossbar in the second detentfrom the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar inthe last detent closest to the rear of the vehicle.

• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placedover the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may

CAUTI

• To prevent damage to theNOT carry any loads oncrossbars installed. The and placed on top of the cthe roof. If it is necessaryroof place a blanket o







experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For

improved satellite radio reception, place the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehiclewhen not in use.

• The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.

roof, place a blanket o

between the load and the• To avoid damage to the r

not exceed the maximum 150 lbs (68 kg). Always devenly as possible and sately.

• Long loads which extensuch as wood panels or slarge frontal area shouldfront and rear of the vehi

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-fully when carrying large or heavy loads on theroof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes ornearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift toa load. This is especially true on large flat loadsand may result in damage to the cargo or your

WARN

Cargo must be securely tivehicle. Improperly securevehicle, particularly at highsonal injury or property dRack Cautions when carryrack.







y g g yvehicle.

rack.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ▫ Compass Display . . . .






Ⅵ Instrument Cluster – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . 182

Ⅵ Instrument Cluster – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . 183

Ⅵ Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Ⅵ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 193

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 198

▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Personal Settings (CustomFeatures) . . . . . . . . . .

▫ System Status . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Sales Code REQ — AM/FM6–Disc CD/DVD Changer

Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Operating Instructions - R

▫ Operation Instructions - And MP3/WMA Audio P

▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 218

▫ List Button(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 220

▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMAPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Ⅵ AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio (RER/REN) – If E i d 223

▫ Operation Instructions —And MP3 Audio Play .

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 F

▫ Operation Instructions - A

Ⅵ Sales Code RES/RSC — AMWith CD Player (MP3 AUXR di

178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL






Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

▫ Operating Instructions — Voice RecognitionSystem (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect phone— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Ⅵ Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With

CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 226

Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Operating Instructions —

▫ Operation Instructions —And MP3 Audio Play .

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 F

▫ List Button (CD Mode Fo

▫ Info Button (CD Mode Fo

Ⅵ Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

▫ Connecting The iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Controlling The iPod Using RadioButtons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Selecting uconnect studMode . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . .

▫ Reception Quality . . . .

▫ Operating Instructions - u(Satellite) Mode . . . . .

UNDERSTANDING YOU






▫Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Ⅵ uconnect studios (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RESRadios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius

Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 253

▫Operating Instructions - u(If Equipped) . . . . . . .

Ⅵ uconnect studios (Sirius BIf Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Video Entertainment SystemXRV) — If Equipped . . . .

Ⅵ Remote Sound System Con

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Radio Operation . . . . .

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Ⅵ CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Ⅵ Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 260

Ⅵ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

▫ Manual Air Conditioning And HeatingSystem — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

▫ Automatic Temperature CEquipped . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . .

▫ Operating Tips Chart .







y q pp

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

UNDERSTANDING YOU






1 - Air Outlet 5 - Upper Switch Bank 9 - Lower Sw

2 - Instrument Cluster 6 - Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter 10 - Climate C3 - Radio 7 - Storage Bin 11 - Ignition S4 - Glove Compartment 8 - Power Outlet 12 - Storage B

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – GASOLINE ENGINE







INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – DIESEL ENGINE

UNDERSTANDING YOU






INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION

1. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed.

2. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions,including brake fluid level and parking brakeapplication. If the brake light turns on, it mayi di h h ki b k i li d h

the brake booster, the ABS pumthe brake and a brake pedal pueach stop.

The dual brake system providity in the event of a failure tosystem. A leak in either half oindicated by the Brake Warninwhen the brake fluid level i







indicate that the parking brake is applied, thatthe brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has beendisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on themaster cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brakehydraulic system malfunction or a problem with theBrake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-tem. In this case, the light will remain on until thecondition has been corrected. If the problem is related to

when the brake fluid level i

dropped below a specified lev

The light will remain on until

NOTE: The light may flash mcornering maneuvers, whichtions. The vehicle should havthe brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, i

sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isdangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could havean accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) l i d ith El t i B k F

The light also will turn on wapplied with the ignition swit

NOTE: This light shows onlapplied. It does not show the d

3. Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash witwhen the turn signal lev

hi if th t i l

UNDERSTANDING YOU






(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake ForceDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, theBrake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABSLight. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked byturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to theON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless

the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

chime if the turn signals are mile (2 km).

4. High Beam Indicator Indicates that headligh

5. Malfunction Indicator LighThe Malfunction Indican onboard diagnostic

monitors engine and atrol systems. The light will illu

the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does notcome on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have thecondition checked promptly.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light afterengine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the lightstays on through several of your typical driving cycles. Inmost situations the vehicle will drive normally and will

during starting, stays on, or tuthe system inspected by an aupossible.

7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) LigThis light monitors t(ABS). The light wilswitch is turned to stay on for as long a







y

not require towing.

The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions thatcould lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalyticconverter damage. The vehicle should be serviced assoon as possible if this occurs.

6. Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six toeight seconds as a bulb check when the ignitionswitch is first turned ON. If the light is not on

y g

If the ABS light remains on orindicates that the Anti-Lock pis not functioning and that serthe conventional brake systemnormally if the BRAKE warni

If the ABS light is on, the brakeas soon as possible to restore

brakes. If the ABS light doeIgnition switch is turned to tlight inspected by an authoriz

8. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute(RPM).

9. Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm isarming. The light will flash at a slower speedcontinuously after the alarm is set. The security

Do not operate the vehicle unThis light does not show howThe engine oil level must be c

11. Electronic Stability Progr/ Traction Control System (TC

If this indicator lightion, apply as little driving, ease up on t

UNDERSTANDING YOU






y y

light will also come on for about three seconds when theignition is first turned on.

10. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. Thelight should turn on momentarily when the engine

is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop thevehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Achime will sound for four minutes when this light turns

on.

g p

speed and driving tditions, and do not switch oProgram (ESP), or Traction Co

12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Each tire, includingshould be checkedinflated to the inflat

by the vehicle ma

placard or tire inflation presshas tires of a different size tha

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for thosetires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale whenone or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

maintain correct tire pressure,not reached the level to triggelow tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenmalfunction indicator to indicoperating properly. The TPMcombined with the low tire psystem detects a malfunction







g y p

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

y

approximately one minute andilluminated. This sequence wquent vehicle start-ups as lonWhen the malfunction indicatem may not be able to detect as intended. TPMS malfunctioof reasons, including the instalternate tires or wheels on thTPMS from functioning proTPMS malfunction telltale af

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andwarning have been established for the tire size

13. Temperature GaugeThe temperature gauge showture. Any reading within the nthe engine cooling system is o

The gauge pointer will likely ture when driving in hot weaor when towing a trailer. It exceed the upper limits of the

UNDERSTANDING YOU






g

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-tion or sensor damage may result when using re-placement equipment that is not of the same size,type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, orbalance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aTPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

CAUTI

Driving with a hot engindamage your vehicle. If the “H” pull over and stop the with the air conditioner turdrops back into the normremains on the “H” and you

turn the engine off immedirized dealership for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You orothers could be badly burned by steam or boilingcoolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If youdecide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-ing System Pressure Cap paragraph

15. TOW/HAUL Indicator LigThis light will illuHAUL button has HAUL button is loinstrument panel (b

16. Electronic Stability Progr/ Brake Assist System (BAS) W

The malfunction lam







ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.

14. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)DisplayWhen the appropriate conditions exist, this displayshows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-ter” later in this section.

ity Program (ESP) Assist System (BASWarning Lamp” co

switch is turned to the “ON”out with the engine running. Lamp” comes on continuousla malfunction has been detectBAS system. If this light remaicycles, and the vehicle has bespeeds greater than 30 mph (4dealer as soon as possible.

17. 4WD LOW Indicator — If EquippedThis light alerts the driver that the vehicle is inthe 4WD LOW mode. The front and rear drive-shafts are mechanically locked together forcingthe front and rear wheels to rotate at the samespeed.

18. Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this

19. Cruise Indicator This indicator lightsystem is turned ON

20. Odometer The odometer shows the tota

been driven.

U.S. federal regulations requvehicle ownership the seller c

UNDERSTANDING YOU






light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulbcheck. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat

belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulbcheck or when driving, if the driver or front passengerseat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Lightwill flash or remain on continuously. Refer to ЉOccupantRestraints/Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System(BeltAlert)Љ in Section 2 for more information.

vehicle ownership, the seller ccorrect mileage that the vehicfore, if the odometer reading ireplacement, be sure to keep

before and after the service so be determined.

21. Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows tshift lever selection.

NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting fromPARK.

22. Fuel GaugeThe pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

23. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with theElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

stall and your vehicle may reqcome on when the ignition is on briefly as a bulb check. If tduring starting, have the sysrized dealer.

24. Front Fog Light IndicatorThis light shows the fr







Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If aproblem is detected the light will come onwhile the engine is running. Cycle the ignition

key when the vehicle has completely stopped and theshift lever is placed in the PARK position. The lightshould turn off. If the light remains lit with the enginerunning your vehicle will usually be drivable, however,see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.If the light is flashing when the engine is running,

immediate service is required and you may experiencereduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine

25. Charging System Light This light shows the staing system. The light s

ignition switch is first turnedas a bulb check. If the light stdriving, turn off some of telectrical devices or increase the charging system light rem

vehicle is experiencing a problem with the chargingsystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-rized dealer.

26. Low Fuel Light This light will turn on, and a single chime willsound, when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. TheLow Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again,

especially during and after hard braking, accelerations,

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INF(EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Informtures a driver-interactive disinstrument cluster.

UNDERSTANDING YOU






or turns. This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in thetank.

27. Glow Plug Indicator Light — Diesel OnlyThis light will illuminate when the ignitionswitch is first turned to the ON position. Waituntil the light turns off before starting thevehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in Sec-

tion 5 of this manual.

The EVIC consists of the follo

• System Status

•

Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

• Compass Display

• Outside Temperature Display

• Trip Computer Functions

The system allows the driver to select information by

FUNCTION SELECT ButtonPress the FUNCTIOthe displayed funct

SCROLL ButtonPress the SCROLL bFunctions, Personalgrammable Feature







pressing the following buttons mounted on the steeringwheel:

MENU ButtonPress and release the MENU button and themode displayed will change between TripFunctions, Personal Settings, and System Sta-tus.

g

sages.

COMPASS/TEMPERATURE BPress and releTEMPERATURE bucompass readings an

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Displays

When the appropriate conditions exist, the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the followingmessages:

• TURN SIGNAL ON

• PERFORM SERVICE

•

•

PROGRAMMING ACTIVGRAMMED

• SERVICE SECURITY KEY

• DRIVER/PASSENGER DO

• LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR

• X DOORS OPEN (with gra

•

UNDERSTANDING YOU






•

DAMAGED KEY — KEY DOES NOT COMMUNI-CATE

• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — KEY NOT PRO-GRAMMED

• WRONG KEY — KEY DOES NOT BELONG TOVEHICLE

• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — EXCEEDED KEY PRO-

GRAM LIMIT

•

LIFTGATE OPEN (with gra• LIFTGATE/DOOR OPEN (

• LIFTGATE/DOORS OPEN

• LIFTGLASS OPEN (with g

• HOOD OPEN (with graphi

• HOOD/DOOR OPEN (wit

• HOOD/DOORS OPEN (wi

•

LIFTGATE/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)• HOOD/GLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• HOOD/GLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• HOOD/GATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• HOOD/GATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• LIFTGLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

•

AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON• AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF

• PARK ASSIST DISABLED

• SERVICE SUSPENSION

• SERVICE PARK ASSIST SY

• TRANSMISSION OVER TE







• LIFTGLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• LIFTGLASS/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)

• WASHER FLUID LOW (with graphic)

• COOLANT LOW (with graphic)

• OIL CHANGE REQUIRED

• OIL CHANGE RESET

• CHECK GAUGES

• CHECK SHIFT PROCEDU

• SERVICE 4WD SYSTEM

• 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRA

• LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVE

• WARNING! LIMIT SPEED

• CHECK GASCAP

• ESP OFF

•

IOD FUSE OUT• HILL DESCENT CONTROL

• MEMORY #1 POSITIONS SET

• MEMORY #2 POSITIONS SET

• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — SEATBELT BUCK-LED (with graphic)

•

•

LEFT FRONT LOW PRESStem Only)

• RIGHT FRONT LOW PREStem Only)

• LEFT REAR LOW PRESSUOnly)

• RIGHT REAR LOW PRESS

UNDERSTANDING YOU






•

MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — VEHICLE NOT INPARK

• DRIVER 1 MEMORY

• DRIVER 2 MEMORY

• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — CRUISE CONTROL SET

• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — SHIFTER IN REVERSE

•

LOW TIRE PRESSURE• CHECK TPM SYSTEM

tem Only)• SPARE LOW PRESSURE

Only)

• WATER IN FUEL (Diesel M

• SERVICE EXHAUST (Diese

• RKE BATTERY LOW

•

VEHICLE NOT IN PARK• IGNITION POSITION

•

PRESS BRAKE TO START• INSERT KEY

• TURN TO ON

Engine Oil Change Indicator System

Oil Change Required (Gasoline Engines Only)Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil changeindicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message

release the MENU button. To tor system (after performing trefer to the following procedu

1. Turn the ignition switch tostart the engine).

2. Fully depress the acceleratowithin 10 seconds.







will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate thenext scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil changeindicator system is duty cycle based, which means theengine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependentupon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display eachtime you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and

3. Turn the ignition switch toNOTE: If the indicator messstart the vehicle, the oil changreset. If necessary, repeat this

Trip Functions

Press and release the MENUfollowing Trip Functions disp

•

Average Fuel Economy• Distance To Empty

•

Trip A• Trip B

• Elapsed Time

• Service Distance

• Display Units of Measure In

Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip

Distance To Empty (DTE)Shows the estimated distancethe fuel remaining in the tankdetermined by a weighted avand average fuel economy, actank level. DTE cannot be reseSELECT button.

NOTE: Significant changes

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Computer functions.The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-tion:

Average Fuel EconomyShows the average fuel economy since the last reset.When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, thehistory information will be erased, and the averaging will

continue from the last fuel average reading before thereset.

loading will greatly affect the the vehicle, regardless of the D

When the DTE value is lesestimated driving distance, thto a “LOW FUEL” message. Tuntil the vehicle runs out of amount of fuel to the vehiclFUEL” message and a new DT

Trip AShows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the lastreset.

Trip BShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the lastreset.

Elapsed TimeShows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset

button once to clear the reseplayed. To reset all resettablethe FUNCTION SELECT buttodisplay will reset along with o

Compass DisplayThe compass readithe vehicle is facinCOMPASS/TEMPE







when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsedtime will increment when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.

Display Units of Measure InTo make your selection, press and release the FUNC-TION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.

To Reset The Display

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is beingdisplayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

one of eight compastemperature.

Automatic Compass CalibraWhen the vehicle is new, the cand the EVIC will display “Ccalibrated. To complete the slowly (5 mph/ 8 km/h) in onin an area, free from magnet

indicator displayed in the EVwill now function normally.

Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicatordoes not appear in the EVIC display, you must put thecompass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:

1. Turn on the ignition switch.

2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Cus-tomer Programmable Features) menu is reached.

Compass VarianceCompass Variance is the difNorth and Geographic Norcountry, the difference betweeNorth is great enough to causreadings. For the most accurthe compass variance must bprocedure:

UNDERSTANDING YOU






3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” isdisplayed in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button tostart the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be dis-played in the EVIC.

5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an areafree from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”indicator turns off. The compass will now function

normally.

NOTE: Magnetic materials sthe Overhead console. This isis located.

4. Press and release the FUNchange the variance numbenumber is reached.

5. Press either MENU, SCRO button to set the value and ex

Personal Settings (Custom

Features)Personal Settings allows the







1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.

3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” is

displayed in the EVIC.

features when the transmissio

Press and release the MENSettings” displays in the EVIC

Use the SCROLL button to dichoices:

LanguageWhen in this display you ma

guages for all display nomenfunctions and the uconnect g

FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display toselect English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you con-tinue, the information will display in the selected lan-guage.

NOTE: The EVIC will not change the uconnect lan-guage selection. Please refer to “Language Selection” inthe uconnect phone section of this manual for details.

Auto Door Locks

opened. To make your selectFUNCTION SELECT buttonappears.

Remote Key UnlockWhen “Driver Door 1st Predriver’s door will unlock on thKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitt“Driver Door 1st Press” is sel

UNDERSTANDING YOU






When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will lockautomatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press andrelease the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) orNO (N) appears.

Auto Unlock On ExitWhen YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will unlockwhen the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is

RKE transmitter UNLOCK bpassenger’s doors. When “Alected, all of the doors will unlRKE transmitter UNLOCK bution, press and release the FUuntil “Driver Door 1st Press”appears.

Sound Horn with Lock

When YES (Y) is selected, a shwhen the RKE transmitter LO

feature may be selected with or without the “FlashLamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, pressand release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y)or NO (N) appears.

Flash Lamps with LockWhen YES (Y) is selected, the front and rear turn signalswill flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with theRKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or

h h “S d H h L k” f T k

Automatic High Beams (AvOnly)When this feature is selected,will deactivate automatically umake your selection, press anSELECT button until YES (Y) o“Lights/SmartBeams — If Equmanual for more information

H dli h O i h Wi







without the “Sound Horn with Lock” feature. To makeyour selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-LECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

Headlamp Off DelayWhen this feature is selected, the driver can choose tohave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 secondswhen exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, pressand release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”

“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.

Headlights On with WipersHeadlights Only)When YES (Y) is selected, andthe AUTO position, the headlmately 10 seconds after the wheadlights will also turn off woff if they were turned on by selection, press and release

button until YES (Y) or NO (N

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytimecauses the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the

brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.

Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If EquippedWhen YES (Y) is selected, the system will automaticallyactivate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture onthe windshield. To make your selection, press and releasethe FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)

Wh NO (N) i l d h

Reset Service Distance (DisInterval was Changed)When this feature is selectedservice distance can be reset tointerval. Press and release theton until YES (Y) or NO (N) a

Easy Entry/Exit Seat (AvailaOnly)

Thi f id

UNDERSTANDING YOU






appears. When NO (N) is selected, the system reverts tothe standard intermittent wiper operation.

Service Interval

Diesel Models — If EquippedWhen this feature is selected, a service interval between2,500 to 12,500 miles (4 000 to 20 000 km) in 625 miles(1 000 km) increments may be selected. To make yourselection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

button to select distances between 2,500 to 12,500 miles (4000 to 20 000 km) in 625 miles (1 000 km) increments.

This feature provides automatenhance driver mobility whevehicle. To make your selectFUNCTION SELECT buttonappears.

NOTE: The seat will returlocation (if Recall Memory witto ON) when the RKE transm

door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “DriverMemory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for moreinformation.

Key Off Power DelayWhen this feature is selected, the power windowswitches, radio, uconnect phone (if equipped), DVDvideo system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes

ft th i iti it h i t d ff O i hi l

Hill Start AssistTo make your selection, preTION SELECT button until Y

Display Units of Measure IThe EVIC, odometer, and uccan be changed between Enmeasure. To make your selecFUNCTION SELECT button







after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicledoor will cancel this feature. To make your selection,press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.

Illuminated ApproachWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will activateand remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors areunlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-

tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT buttonuntil “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.

appears.System Status

Press and release the MENUfollowing System Status mess

• System OK

• System Warnings Displayedactive System Warnings.)

• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pres-sure of all four road tires.) For additional information,refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in Section 5 of this manual.

NOTE:• Tires heat up during norm

will cause the tire pressure(14 to 41 kPa) during normato “Tires-General Informsures” in Section 5 for add

• Your system can be set to dikPa, or BAR.

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Tire Pressure Display

SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIOAND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX

JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower rightside of the radio faceplate.

Operating Instructions - Ra

NOTE: The ignition switch mposition to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume ContPush the ON/VOLUME conradio. Press the ON/VOLUMtime to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume ControlTh l i l







The electronic volume controdegrees) in either direction witON/VOLUME control knobvolume and to the left decrea

When the audio system is turset at the same volume level a

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK bulistenable station in AM/FM m

REQ Radio

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radiowill remain tuned to the new station until you makeanother selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping until you release it.

SCAN ButtonPressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search forthe next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at eachlistenable station before continuing to the next. To stopth h th SCAN b tt d ti

Phone Button uconnect phPress this button to operate th(if equipped). Refer to “uconn

If your vehicle is not equippedavailable on your vehicle, uconnect” message will displ

TIME ButtonPress the TIME button to alte

and frequency display

UNDERSTANDING YOU






the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone — IfEquippedPress this button to operate the uconnect phone feature(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect phone” in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is notavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.

and frequency display.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME bu

2. Adjust the hours by turniSCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, pSCROLL control knob to set will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to save the time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP buttonand selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once inthis display follow the above procedure, starting atstep 2.

INFO B tt

TUNE ControlTurn the rotary TUNE/SCROto increase or counterclockwis

Setting the Tone, Balance, aPush the rotary TUNE/SCROwill display. Turn the TUNEthe right or left to increase or

Push the rotary TUNE/SCRO

time and MID will display







INFO ButtonPress the INFO button for an RDS station (one with callletters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Textmessage broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonscauses the tuner to search for the next frequency in thedirection of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FMor Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

time and MID will display. control knob to the right or leftmid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCRtime and TREBLE will displaycontrol knob to the right or lefttreble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROtime and BALANCE will d

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust thesound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timeand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again toexit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSIC TYPE Button

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE butformat types:

Program Type

No program type or un-defined

Adult Hits

Classical

Classic RockC ll

UNDERSTANDING YOU






MUSIC TYPE ButtonPressing this button once will turn on the Music Typemode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttonor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fiveseconds will allow the program format type to be se-lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcastMusic Type information.

Classic Rock College

Country

Foreign Language

Information

Jazz

News

Nostalgia

Oldies

Program Type 16-Digit CharacterDisplay

Personality Persnlty

Public Public

Rhythm and Blues R & B

Religious Music Rel Musc

Religious Talk Rel Talk

Rock Rock

Soft Soft

station with the same selecteMusic Type function only omode.

If a preset button is activated(Program Type) mode, the Mexited and the radio will tune

SETUP ButtonPressing the SETUP button al

the following items:







Soft SoftSoft Rock Soft Rck

Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B

Sports Sports

Talk Talk

Top 40 Top 40

Weather Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type iconis displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

the following items:NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCRthrough the entries. Push the Aselect an entry and make chan

• DVD Enter - When the diselecting DVD Enter will allhighlighted selection. Use tup and down the menu (if

• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle betweenplaying the DVD and pausing the DVD bypushing the SELECT button (if equipped).

• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Optionswill display the following:

• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switchsubtitles to different subtitle languages that areavailable on the disc (if equipped).

NOTE:• The available selections fo

varies depending upon the

• These selections can only DVD.

• VES™ Power - Allows yoOFF (if equipped).

• VES™ Lock - Locks out reaequipped)

UNDERSTANDING YOU






• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT willswitch to different audio languages (if supported onthe disc) (if equipped).

• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will changethe viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if equipped).

equipped).

• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allowmode of either the IR1 or IRpressing the AUDIO/SELE

• Set Home Clock - Pressingyou to set the clock. Turn thknob to adjust the hours an

TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.

Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to savechanges.

• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow theuser to scroll through the following items and setdefaults according to customer preference.

Menu Language — If EquippedSelecting this item will allow the user to choose the

default startup DVD menu language (effective only if

down and selecting Љother.Љ En

the TUNE/SCROLL control kto select the number and then

Subtitle Language — If EquipSelecting this item allows you language (effective only if thethe disc). You can select a langdown and selecting Љother.Љ Enthe TUNE/SCROLL control kto select the number and then







default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language supported by disc). If you want to select alanguage not listed, then scroll down and select Љother.ЉEnter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select thenumber and then push to select.

Audio Language — If EquippedSelecting this item allows you to choose a default audio

language (effective only if the language is supported bythe disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling

to select the number and then

Subtitles — If EquippedSelecting this item allows youOff or On.

Audio DRC — If EquippedSelecting this item allows youdynamic range. The default i

this setting, dialogues will playsetting is ЉNormal.Љ

Aspect Ratio — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between widescreen, pan scan, and letter box.

AutoPlay — If EquippedWhen this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will

bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play themovie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may notauto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU

button on the remote control to select desired title to play.

h ll h h d f l b f

SET Button — To Set the Pu

When you are receiving a commit to pushbutton memoThe symbol SET 1 will now shSelect the button (1-6) you wiand press and release that bselected within five seconds aton, the station will continustored into pushbutton memo

You may add a second statio

UNDERSTANDING YOU






NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults beforeloading a disc. If changes are made to these settings aftera disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, thedefaults are effective only if the disc supports thecustomer-preferred settings.

AM and FM ButtonsPress the buttons to select AM or FM mode.

You may add a second statiorepeating the above procedurethe SET button twice and SETwindow. Each button can be

both AM and FM. This allowand 12 Satellite (if equipped)pushbutton memory. The smemory can be selected by

twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio to the stations that youcommit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

DISC ButtonPressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

CAUTIThe radio may shut downconditions. When this occur“Disc Hot” and shut off unreached. This shutdown is optics of the DVD player acomponents.

NOTE: The ignition switch mi i h di







AM/FM modes to Disc modes.Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and

MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded bygeographic region. These region codes must match inorder for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVDdisc does not match the region code for the radio DVDplayer, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their

vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region codeof the player a maximum of five times.


LOAD Button — Loading CPress the LOAD button andcorresponding number (1-6)loaded. The radio will dispprompt when to INSERT DISЉINSERT DISC,Љ insert the CD

Radio display will show ЉLOADING DISCЉ when the disc

is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio isreading the disc.

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.The use of other sized discs may damage the CDplayer mechanism.

Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)

The disc can be ejected with th

SEEK Button (CD MODE)Press the right SEEK button foCD. Press the left SEEK buttonof the current selection, or retprevious selection if the CD isthe current selection. Pressin

button will allow you to scroll CD and MP3/MWA modes.

SCAN B tt (CD MODE)

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc(s)Press the EJECT button and the pushbuttonwith the corresponding number (1-6) where theCD was loaded and the disc will unload andmove to the entrance for easy removal. Radio

display will show ЉEJECTING DISCЉ when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and allCDs will be ejected from the radio.

SCAN Button (CD MODE)Press the SCAN button to scanCD currently playing.

TIME Button (CD MODE)Press this button to change thplaying time display to a smal

RW/FF (CD MODE)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW oranother CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) buttonworks in a similar manner.

AM or FM Button (CD MODE)Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files

The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptableMP3/WMA fil di di d f t li it d

Supported Medium Format

The medium formats supporteLevel 1 and Level 2 and inclWhen reading discs recordedISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2,files properly and may be unmally. UDF and Apple HFS fo

The radio uses the following l

•

Maximum number of direc







e o c p y M 3/ M es; o e e , ccep b eMP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to thefollowing restrictions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by theradio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.

M be o ec• Maximum number of files:

• Maximum number of folde

• Maximum number of chara

• Level 1: 12 (including a character extension)

•

Level 2: 31 (including a character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normalCD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/WMA files). Discs created with an option such as Љkeepdisc open after writingЉ are most likely multisessiondiscs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio andMP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/

WMA tracks on that disc.

frequencies in the following

addition, variable bit rates (VBmajority of MP3/WMA files uand a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR

MPEGSpecification

SamplFrequency

MPEG-1 AudioLayer 3

48, 44.1

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Supported MP3/WMA File FormatsThe radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMAextension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA filesnamed with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-

back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the fileas an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.

When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audiodata to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling

MPEG-2 AudioLayer 3

24, 22.0

WMASpecification

SamplFrequency

WMA 44.1 an

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is notsupported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are notsupported.

Playback of MP3/WMA FilesWhen a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take moretime to start playing the MP3/WMA files

• Number of files and fold

increase with more files an

To increase the speed of disc lto use CD-R media and singlesingle-session disc, enable th

before writing to the disc.

LIST Button (DISC Mode foPressing the LIST button will b

on the disc. Scrolling up or turning the TUNE/SCROLL







,time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.

Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may beaffected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load thanCD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

g pturning the TUNE/SCROLL folder by pressing the TUNE/

begin playing the files contanext folder in sequence if the playable files).

The folder list will time out a

INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll throughthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, FileName, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to ЉelapsedtimeЉ priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds ormore and radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds

Pressing the AUX button will

iary device if the AUX jack is

NOTE: The AUX device mdevice’s volume set to the prois not loud enough, turn the AUX audio sounds distorteddown.

SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mo

No function.

UNDERSTANDING YOU






gto return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack whichallows the user to plug in a portable device such as anMP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone andutilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the sourceand play through the vehicle speakers.

SCAN Button (Auxiliary MNo function.

EJECT Button (Auxiliary MNo function.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press the TIME button to change the display fromelapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day willdisplay for five seconds.

RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)No function.

SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)No function.

Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition

Operating Instructions - uc

(Satellite Radio) (If EquippRefer to “uconnect studiossection.

Operating Instructions - ViSystem (VES)™ (If EquippeRefer to separate “Video EnteGuide.”

Dolby

Manufactured under license f







p g gSystem (VR) (If Equipped)For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” inSection 3.

For uconnect “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to“uconnect phone” in Section 3.

Operating Instructions - uconnect phone (If

Equipped)Refer to “uconnect phone” in Section 3.

yManufactured under license fЉDolbyЉ and the double-D sDolby Laboratories.

MacrovisionThis product incorporates copogy that is protected by U.S. tual property rights. Use of

technology must be authoriz

intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,

unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverseengineering or disassembly is prohibited.

DTS™ЉDTS™Љ and ЉDTS™ 2.0Љ are trademarks of Digital The-ater Systems, Inc.

AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO (RER/REN) – IF

EQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side

Refer to your uconnect tun

manual for detailed operating

Operating Instructions — V

System (VR) — If EquippedFor the radio, refer to “Voice RSection 3.

Operating Instructions — u

Equipped

Refer to “uconnect

phone” iCl k S i P d

UNDERSTANDING YOU






gof the unit’s faceplate.

The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USBport, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius SatelliteRadio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allowsfor easy menu selection.

The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System

(GPS)-based Navigation system.

pClock Setting Procedure

uconnect gps — RER onlyThe GPS receiver used in thisthe time data being transmittesatellite clock is Greenwich Meworldwide standard for timeclock very accurate once the a

daylight savings information



Show Time if Radio is Off

When selected, this feature will display the time of dayon the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceedas follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in

the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”T h th h th d “Sh Ti if R di i

Changing the Time Zone

1. Turn on the radio.

2. Touch the screen where thclock setting menu will appea

3. Touch the screen where the displayed. The time zone selethe screen.

4. Select a time zone by touchselection appears. If you do n

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio isOff” are displayed to change the current setting.

pp ywant to select, touch the screendisplayed to view additional

5. Touch the screen where the

SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO

WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)


Operating Instructions — R


Power Switch/Volume ContPush the ON/VOLUME conradio. Push the ON/VOLUMtime to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume controd ) i ith di ti







degrees) in either direction, wthe ON/VOLUME control knovolume, and to the left decrea


RES Radio

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextlistenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switchto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radiowill remain tuned to the new station until you makeanother selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping, until you release it.

TIME ButtonPress the TIME button to alternate locations of the time

and frequency display.

4. Adjust the minutes usin

SCROLL control knob. Press thknob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/k

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or causes the tuner to search fordirection of the arrows. This

AM or FM frequencies.TUNE Control

UNDERSTANDING YOU







1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minuteswill begin to blink.

TUNE ControlTurn the rotary TUNE/SCROto increase or counterclockwis


Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease themid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a thirdtime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thetreble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourthtime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/


exit setting tone, balance, and

AM/FM ButtonPress the buttons to select eith

SET/RND Button — To SetMemoryWhen you are receiving a commit to pushbutton mem

button. The symbol SET 1 wilwindow. Select the button (1 t







p ySCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust thesound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timeand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe front and rear speakers.

this station and press and releis not selected within five sSET/RND button, the stationwill not be stored into pushbu

You may add a second statiorepeating the above procedure

the SET/RND button twice adisplay window. Each button

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected bypressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FMstations).

Operation Instructions —

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:• The ignition switch must

position to operate the radi

• This radio is capable of plarecordable compact discs (discs (CD-RW), compact d

multisession compact discsInserting Compact Disc(s)

UNDERSTANDING YOU






DISC ButtonPressing the DISC button will allow you to switch fromAM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)Gently insert one CD into thlabel facing up. The CD will authe CD player and the CD icradio display. If a CD does no1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may alreejected before a new disc can

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display willshow the track number, and index time in minutes andseconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discsonly. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.• Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel

EJECT Button - Ejecting a C

Press the EJECT but

If you have ejected a disc and h10 seconds, it will be reloadedthe radio will reinsert the CD

A disc can be ejected with the

NOTE: Ejecting with the igni







• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peelaway and jam the player mechanism.

• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to inserta second CD if one is already loaded.

• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, theother side is a CD) should not be used, and theycan cause damage to the player.

convertible or soft-top model

SEEK ButtonPress the right SEEK button foCD. Press the left SEEK buttonof the current selection, or retprevious selection if the CD is

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks inCD and MP3 modes.

TIME ButtonPress this button to change the display from a large CDplaying time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FFPress and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CDplayer will begin to fast forward until FF is released, orRW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)b k l

SET/RND Button (Random

Press this button while the Random Play. This feature pcompact disc in random ordechange of pace.

Press the right SEEK buttondomly selected track.

Press the RND button a secoPlay.

Notes on Playing MP3 File

UNDERSTANDING YOU






button works in a similar manner.

AM/FM ButtonPress the button to select either AM or FM mode.

Notes on Playing MP3 File

The radio can play MP3 files;file recording media and fowriting MP3 files, pay attentitions.

Supported Media (Disc TypThe MP3 file recording media

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.When reading discs recorded using formats other thanISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to readfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nor-mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

exceeding 20 folders will r

200 files, exceeding 50 fdisplay.)

• Maximum number of chara



Multisession disc formats arM l i i di







Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of filenames and folder names is limited. For large numbersof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable todisplay the file name and folder name, and will assigna number instead. With a maximum number of files,

Multisession discs may contaCD audio tracks and computerDiscs created with an option suwritingЉ are most likely multmultisession for CD audio or Mlonger disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3extension may cause playback problems. The radio isdesigned to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and willnot play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data toan MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in thefollowing table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 filesuse a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

MPEG

Specification

Sampl

Frequency

MPEG-2 AudioLayer 3

24, 22.0

ID3 Tag information for artistare supported for version 1 IDsupported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supportt d

UNDERSTANDING YOU






p g , , ,VBR bit rate.

MPEGSpecification

SamplingFrequency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 AudioLayer 3

48, 44.1, 32

320, 256, 224,192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

supported.

Playback of MP3 FilesWhen a medium containingradio checks all files on thecontains a lot of folders or filetime to start playing the MP3

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longerto load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times willincrease with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommendedt CD R di d i l i di T t

MP3 player, or cassette playe

audio system to amplify the sovehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX buttoauxiliary device if the AUX ja

NOTE: The AUX device mdevice’s volume set to propernot loud enough, turn the deviaudio sounds distorted, turn t

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mo







to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create asingle-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option

before writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, whichallows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an

yPress this button to change thetime of day will display for fivOFF).

SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO

RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) ANDSIRIUS RADIO


Operating Instructions — R


Power Switch/Volume ContPush the ON/VOLUME conradio. Push the ON/VOLUMtime to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume controdegrees) in either direction wit

UNDERSTANDING YOU






g )ON/VOLUME control knobvolume and to the left decrea


SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK bulistenable station in AM/FM m

RES/RSC Radio

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you makeanother selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping until you release it.

Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If EquippedRefer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.

Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone — IfEquippedPress this button to operate the uconnect phone feature(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect phone” in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped

available on your vehicle, uconnect” message will displ

TIME ButtonPress the TIME button to alteand frequency display.


1. Press and hold the TIME bu

2. Adjust the hours by turniSCROLL control knob







If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is notavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped Withuconnect” message will display on the radio screen.

Phone Button uconnect phone — If EquippedPress this button to operate the uconnect phone feature(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect phone” in Section 3.

SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, pSCROLL control knob to set will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes usinSCROLL control knob. Press th

knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press theSETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to selectSET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satelliteradio, press the SETUP button and then follow the aboveprocedure, starting at Step 2.

INFO ButtonPress the INFO button for an RDS station (one with callletters displayed) The radio will return a Radio Text

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROto increase or counterclockwis


Push the rotary TUNE/SCROtime and MID will display. control knob to the right or leftmid-range tones

UNDERSTANDING YOU






letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Textmessage broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonscauses the tuner to search for the next frequency in thedirection of the arrows. This feature operates in eitherAM or FM frequencies.

mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCRtime and TREBLE will displaycontrol knob to the right or lefttreble tones.


time and BALANCE will d

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

sound level from the right or left side speakers.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timeand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again toexit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSIC TYPE ButtonPressing this button once will turn on the Music Type

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE but

format types:

Program Type

No program type or un-defined

Adult Hits

Classical

Classic Rock

College Country







mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttonor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fiveseconds will allow the program format type to be se-lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcastMusic Type information.

Country

Foreign Language

Information

Jazz

News

Nostalgia

Oldies

Program Type16-Digit Character

DisplayPersonality Persnlty

Public Public

Rhythm and Blues R & B

Religious Music Rel Musc

Religious Talk Rel Talk

Rock Rock

Soft Soft

Soft Rock Soft Rck

Soft Rh thm and Blues Soft R&B

By pressing the SEEK button

is displayed, the radio will be tstation with the same selecteMusic Type function only omode.


SETUP ButtonPressing the SETUP button althe following items:

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B

Sports Sports

Talk Talk

Top 40 Top 40

Weather Weather

the following items:

• Set Clock — Pressing the you to set the clock. Turn thknob to adjust the hours anTUNE/SCROLL control knPress the TUNE/SCROLL changes.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.SET/RND Button — To Set the PushbuttonMemoryWhen you are receiving a station that you wish tocommit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the displaywindow. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock ontothis station and press and release that button. If a button

is not selected within five seconds after pressing theSET/RND button, the station will continue to play but

ill b d i hb

and 12 FM stations to be stored

The stations stored in SET 2 mpressing the pushbutton twice

Every time a preset button button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radiocommit to pushbutton memstations).

DISC/AUX ButtonP i h DISC/AUX b







will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in thedisplay window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

Pressing the DISC/AUX buttofrom AM/FM modes to DISC

Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and

MP3 Audio PlayNOTE:• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compactdiscs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks andmultisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)G tl i t CD i t th CD l ith th CD

If you insert a disc with the i

ON, the unit will switch fro begin to play when you insershow the track number, and iseconds. Play will begin at th

CAUTI

• This CD player will acceonly. The use of other siz

CD player mechanism.• Do not use adhesive labe

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CDlabel facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled intothe CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on theradio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must beejected before a new disc can be loaded.

away and jam the player

• RES is a single CD playera second CD if one is alr

• Dual-media disc types (other side is a CD) shoucan cause damage to the

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed onconvertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

the current selection. Pressin

button will allow faster scrolCD and MP3 modes.

TIME ButtonPress this button to change thplaying time display to a smal

RW/FFPress and hold FF (Fast Forwa

begin to fast forward until

another CD button is pressedworks in a similar manner.







p ( q pp )

SEEK ButtonPress the right SEEK button for the next selection on theCD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginningof the current selection, or return to the beginning of theprevious selection if the CD is within the first second of

AM/FM ButtonPress the button to select eith

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activateRandom Play. This feature plays the selections on thecompact disc in random order to provide an interestingchange of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-domly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-dom Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however acceptable MP3

Supported Medium Format

The medium formats supporteLevel 1 and Level 2 and inclWhen reading discs recordedISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2,files properly and may be unmally. UDF and Apple HFS fo

The radio uses the following l

• Maximum number of folde

• Maximum number of files:

UNDERSTANDING YOU






The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3file recording media and formats are limited. Whenwriting MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-tions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

• Maximum number of foldernames and folder names is of files and/or folders, thdisplay the file name and foa number instead. With a m

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in thisdisplay.)

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-character extension)

• Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

Supported MP3 File Forma

The radio will recognize onlysion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 fextension may cause playbadesigned to recognize the file not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoderan MP3 file, the bit rate and safollowing table are supported

rates (VBR) are also supporteduse a 44.1 kHz sampling rateVBR bit rates







yCD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open afterwritingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result inlonger disc loading times.

VBR bit rates.

MPEGSpecification

SamplFrequency

MPEG-1 AudioLayer 3

48, 44.1

MPEG

Specification

Sampling

Frequency (kHz)Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-2 AudioLayer 3

24, 22.05, 16

160, 128, 144,112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album titleare supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is notsupported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are notsupported.

Loading times for playback of

by the following:• Media - CD-RW media ma

CD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisesto load than non-multisess

• Number of files and foldincrease with more files an

To increase the speed of disc lto use CD-R media and single

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Playback of MP3 FilesWhen a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, theradio checks all files on the medium. If the mediumcontains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take moretime to start playing the MP3 files.

single-session disc, enable th before writing to the disc.

LIST Button (CD Mode for

Pressing the LIST button will bon the disc. Scrolling up or turning the TUNE/SCROLL

folder by pressing the TUNE/

begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the

next folder in sequence if the selection does not containplayable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll throughthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, FileName, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return toЉelapsedtimeЉ priority mode.

Operation Instructions - Au

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is aallows the user to plug in a pMP3 player or cassette playeaudio system to amplify the sovehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button williary device if the AUX jack is

NOTE: The AUX device m

device’s volume set to the prois not loud enough, turn the







Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds ormore and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three secondsto return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.

AUX audio sounds distorteddown.

TIME Button (Auxiliary MoPress this button to change thetime of day will display foignition is OFF).

Operating Instructions - uconnect phone (If

Equipped)Refer to “uconnect phone” in Section 3.

Operating Instructions - uconnect studios(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)Refer to “uconnect studios (Satellite Radio)” in thissection.

UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF

EQUIPPED

NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/REL/RET radios only with uconnect For sales code

This feature allows you to

vehicle’s sound system througthe provided interface cable.

UCI supports Mini, 4G, PhoiPhone devices. Some iPod

fully support the UCI featuwebsite for software updates.

NOTE:• If the radio has a USB port,

port does not play the meduse the separate 16–pin co

h

UNDERSTANDING YOU






REL/RET radios only with uconnect. For sales codeRER, REN, REP, REW or REZ touch-screen radio UCIfeature, refer to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’sManual. UCI is available only if equipped as an optionwith these radios.

compartment on some veh

• Connecting an iPod to thradio faceplate, plays medifeature to control the conne

Connecting The iPod

Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod

tothe vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located inthe glove compartment on some vehicles). Once theiPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCIsystem (iPod may take a few seconds to connect), theiPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressingradio switches, as described below.

NOTE:•

You may have to remove the connector pin protectioncap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-ing the cable.

Using This Feature

By using the optional conneiPod to the vehicle’s UCI 16–

• The iPod audio can be plasystem, providing metadataetc.) information on the rad

• The iPod can be controlledPlay, Browse, and List the i

•

The iPod

battery charges wconnector.

C t lli Th iP d U i







ing the cable.

• If the iPod battery is completely discharged, it maynot communicate with the UCI system until a mini-mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod connectedto the UCI system may charge it to the required level.

Controlling The iPod UsinTo get into the UCI (iPod) moiPod, press the ‘AUX’ buttoOnce in the UCI (iPod) moavailable from iPod) start paudio system.

Play Mode

When switched to UCI mode, the iPod

automaticallystarts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use thefollowing buttons on the radio faceplate to control theiPod and display data:

• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next orprevious track.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, whileplaying a track, skips to the next track.

• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by oneclick, during the first two seconds of the track, will

• Jump backward in the cu

holding the << RW bu button long enough willof the current track.

• Jump forward in the currholding the FF >> button.

• A single press backward << jump backward or forwseconds.

• Use the << SEEK and SEEKprevious or next track. If

UNDERSTANDING YOU






, g , jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this button at any other time in the track, will jump tothe beginning of the current track.

ppressed during the first two

jump to the previous track button at any other time in beginning of the track. If button during play mode, itin the list.

• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see

the associated metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.)for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumpsto the next screen of data for that track. Once you haveseen all screens, the last INFO button press will takeyou back to the play mode screen on the radio.

• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod

mode to repeat the current playing track.

• Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode, which

will play the first five seconds of each track in thecurrent list and then forward to the next song. To stopSCAN mode and start pla ing the desired track when

Shuffle OFF modes for the

showing on the radio displaON.

List Or Browse ModeDuring Play mode, pressing an

below, takes you to List modescroll through the list of menu

• TUNE control knob: The TUin a similar manner as the

• Turning it clockwise (fowise (backward) scrolls th







SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, whenit is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.During Scan mode you can also press the << SEEKand SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and nexttracks.

• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):

Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and

( )the track detail on the radthe track to be played display, press the TUNEstart playing the track. Tknob fast will scroll throfast scroll, you may notic

the information on the ra

• During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the

bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.

• In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used asshortcuts to the following lists on the iPod.

• Preset 1 – Playlists

• Preset 2 – Artists

• Preset 3 – Albums

• Preset 4 – Genres

• To Exit List mode withousame PRESET button amode.

• LIST button: The LIST bulevel menu of the iPod. Tuto list the top-menu item ythe TUNE control knob. Tsub-menu list item on the ithe same steps to go to the

Not all iPod

sub-menu lesystem.

• MUSIC TYPE button: The

UNDERSTANDING YOU






• Preset 5 - Audiobooks

• Preset 6 – Podcasts

• Pressing a PRESET button, will display the currentlist on the top line and the first item in that list on

the second line.

• MUSIC TYPE button: Theanother shortcut button toiPod.

CAUTION!

• Leaving the iPod (or any supported device) any-where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold canalter the operation, or damage the device. Followthe device manufacturer’s guidelines.

• Placing items on the iPod , or connections to theiPod in the vehicle, can cause damage to thedevice and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!

D t l i th iP d hil d i i

uconnect studios (SATELEQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER

Satellite radio uses direct sateing technology to provide clecoast. The subscription serviceRadio. This service offers ovsports, news, entertainment, adren, directly from its satellite

NOTE: Sirius service is not a

limited coverage in Alaska.System ActivationSirius Satellite Radio service







Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving.Failure to following this warning could result in anaccident.

Sirius Satellite Radio servicemay begin listening immediatservice that is included with thradio system in your vehiclecome kit that contains genehow to setup your on-line lis

tional charge. For further inf

number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site atwww.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-dian residents.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)Please have the following information available whencalling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID).

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID refer to the following steps:

Sirius ID number will displdisplay will time out in two mthe radio to exit this screen.

ESN/SID Access With RENWhile in SAT mode, press the faceplate.

Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTIOAll the ESNs that apply to you

Selecting uconnect studi

Press the SAT button until ЉSACD may remain in the radio w

UNDERSTANDING YOU






To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES RadiosWith the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scrollusing the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID isselected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the

mode.

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum receptionroof around the rooftop antenplaced within the line of sigh

decreased performance. Larg

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, withinthe loading design of the rack. Do not place items directlyon or above the antenna.

Reception QualitySatellite reception may be interrupted due to one of thefollowing reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parkingstructure or under a physical obstacle.

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in theform of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can

Operating Instructions - uc(Satellite) Mode


SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buchannel in Satellite mode. Preup and the left switch to seremain tuned to the new chan

selection. Holding either buwithout stopping until you re







• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings cancause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna cancause signal blockage.

SCAN ButtonPressing the SCAN button cauthe next channel, pausing fortinuing to the next. To stop th

button a second time.

INFO ButtonPressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for anadditional three seconds will make the radio display theSong Title all of the time (press and hold again to returnto normal display).

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonscauses the tuner to search for the next channel in thedirection of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)

MUSIC TYPE ButtonPressing this button once wimode for five seconds. Pressinor turning the Tune/Scroll seconds will allow the progrlected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE buttotype.

By pressing the SEEK butto

function is active, the radio channel with the same selecte

If b d

UNDERSTANDING YOU






TUNE Control (Rotary)Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.


SETUP ButtonPressing the SETUP button allows you to select thefollowing items:

• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. Thisnumber is used to activate, deactivate, or change theSirius subscription.

SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton MemoryWhen you are receiving a channel that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel

You may add a second channrepeating the above procedurethe SET button twice and SETwindow. Each button can be seallows a total of 12 Satellite pushbutton memory. The cmemory can be selected bytwice.

Every time a preset button button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio







Select the button (1 6) you wish to lock onto this channeland press and release that button. If a button is notselected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-ton, the channel will continue to play but will not bestored into pushbutton memory.

These buttons tune the radiocommit to pushbutton memo

Operating Instructions - uc

Equipped)Refer to “uconnect phone” i

uconnect studios (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) —IF EQUIPPED

Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcastingtechnology to provide streaming video. The subscriptionservice provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Back-seat TV™ offers three video channels for family enter-tainment, directly from its satellites and broadcastingstudios.

NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii andhas limited coverage in Alaska.

Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RERNavigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de-

powered remote control, and tVES™ User’s Manual for deta

The LCD screen is located onfront seats.

UNDERSTANDING YOU






gtailed operating instructions.

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™ (SALESCODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED

The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con-sists of a LCD (liquid crystal display) screen, a battery-

Lowering the Di

Remote Control Location Remote Sound System Contro







REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rearsurface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel toaccess the switches.

The right-hand control is a rpushbutton in the center andmode of the sound system. Prswitch will increase the volumof the rocker switch will decr

Whee

Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/CD, Etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with apushbutton in the center. The function of the left-handcontrol is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation ineach mode.

Radio Operation

Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the nextlistenable station and pressing the bottom of the switchwill “Seek” down for the next listenable station

CD PlayerPressing the top of the switctrack on the CD. Pressing thewill go to the beginning of t

beginning of the previous tracafter the current track begins

If you press the switch up orsecond track; three times, it w

The center button on the left

function for a single-disc CDmultiple-disc CD player is eqcenter button will select the

UNDERSTANDING YOU






will Seek down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand controlwill tune to the next preset station that you have pro-grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.

player.

CD/DVD MAINTENANCETo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the followingprecautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching thesurface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-ing the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,or antistatic sprays.

NOTE: If you experience difflar disc, it may be damagedcoating removed, a hair, mooversized, or have protectiongood disc before considering

RADIO OPERATION AND CUnder certain conditions, the your vehicle can cause erratic your radio. This condition ma

by relocating the cellular phois not harmful to the radio. Idoes not satisfactorily “clear”

t it i d d







5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may becometoo high.

antenna, it is recommended turned down or off during cel

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System —If Equipped

The controls for the heating/air conditioning and venti-lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotaryknobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desiredinterior conditions.

Manual Air Conditioning

UNDERSTANDING YOU






The instrument panel featurregisters. Two registers are lothe instrument panel and twothe instrument panel. These partially block airflow, and thairflow where the occupant d

Blower ControlThe blower control rotary knob (on the

left) controls the blower and can be setto one of four speeds, and OFF. Theblower fan motor will remain on un-til the system is turned to the OFFposition or the ignition is turnedOFF.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, theclimate controls will not function during Remote Startoperation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)position.

Temperature ControlThe temper

(in the cenperature. Thting is on warmest seof the rotattioned at an

Mode ControlThe mode cright) can btions. Dots selections id







selections idthat allow airflow dist

Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the

outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is alsodirected to the front door windows through the sidewindow demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to thefloor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.

Defrost/Floor Air flows through the front and rear floor outletsand the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air isalso directed to the front door windows through the

side window demister grilles. Some airflow is deliveredto the floor while in defrost so that comfort can bemaintained.

through vents under the frodelivered to defrost while i

comfort can be maintained.

Bi-LevelAir flows both throughinstrument panel and tho

flows through the registers console, and under the fropassengers. These registers c

block airflow. The center contioned air while the floor outl

PanelAi fl h h h

UNDERSTANDING YOU






maintained.

Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located underthe instrument panel and into the rear seating area

Air flows through the oument panel. Air flows th

back of the center console toThese registers can be closed t

RecirculationThe recirculation feature can be selected with

the mode control knob. You may choose be-tween Bi-Level Recirculation and Panel Recir-culation air outlets while in this mode. Nor-

mally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However, whenin “Recirculation” mode air inside the vehicle is re-used.Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle.The “Recirculation” mode can also be used to tempo-rarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.

Air ConditioningTo turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan controlat any speed and press the snowflake button

Slight changes in engine speedwhen the air conditioning co

normal occurrence as the comoff to maintain comfort and in

Automatic Temperature CoThe Automatic Temperature cally maintains the interior codriver and passenger.







at any speed and press the snowflake buttonlocated on the control panel. Conditioned air will

be directed through the outlets selected by the modecontrol. A light in the snowflake button shows that the airconditioning is on.

NOTE Th b th t t di l t

be used for front seat occupposition should be used when

when rear seat occupants are psetting you would like the systthe driver’s or passenger’s cofort level is selected, the systeautomatically using the heatisired comfort level require aiwill automatically make the a

You will experience the gre

allowing the system to functithe OFF (O) position on the blosystem completely.

Automatic Temperature Controls

UNDERSTANDING YOU






NOTE: The numbers on the temperature dial representa comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO,and not the actual air temperature.

Turn the mode control (on the right) knob to AUTO, andthen turn the blower control (on the left) knob to either

LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should

y p y

NOTE: The temperature setttime without affecting automaever, if the driver and/or pasare set to the full hot or futemperature out of the ducts

respectively. With the temperature setting in these posi-tions, the system does not attempt automatic comfort

control.

Air ConditioningThe air conditioning in this system is automatic.Pressing this button while in AUTO mode willcause the LED to flash three times and remain off.

This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requestingthe air conditioning is not necessary.

RecirculationThe system will automatically control recircu-lation. However, pressing this button will tem-poraril put the s stem in “Recirculation”

NOTE:• The surface of the climate

center of the instrument padebris due to the climateMud on the windshield mayof this system.

• To provide you with maximatic mode, during cold stremain off until the enginefan will engage immediat

selected or if you manually

• Under certain conditions (off) the climate control s s







porarily put the system in “Recirculation”mode. This can be used when outside condi-

tions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity arepresent. This will cause the LED to illuminate.

off) the climate control sysnoise may be heard for 2normal operation.

• Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, youcan temporarily put the system into Recirculation

mode by pressing the “Recirculation” button. How-ever, under certain conditions in automatic the systemis blowing air out of the defrost vents. When theseconditions are present, and the “Recirculation” buttonis pressed, the indicator will flash and remain off. Thistells you that you are unable to go into Recirculationmode at this time. If you would like to go to Recircu-lation mode, you must first move your mode knob to

Panel, Panel/Floor, or Floor, then press the “Recircu-lation” button. This feature will reduce the possibilityof window fogging.

Manual OperationThis system offers a full comp

features which consist of BloMode Preferred Automatic wiControl, and Manual. This override the blower, mode, aTemperature Control complete

NOTE: Please read the AutomOperation Chart below for de

UNDERSTANDING YOU












NOTE: Regardless of the type of operation, when atemperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full

counterclockwise position, the system will deliver fullhot or full cold air out of the ducts, respectively.

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting andselect the direction of the air by rotating the right modeknob to one of the following positions. When the Mode isset to any position other than AUTO, the automaticcontrol of air temperature is disabled. The user mustadjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem-

perature.

Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the

NOTE: The defrost mode is nIt must be manually selected,

Defrost/Floor Air flows through the fand the outlets at the baalso directed to the front

side window demister grillesto the floor while in defrosmaintained.

Floor Air flows through the fthe instrument panel an

through vents under the fro

UNDERSTANDING YOU






Air is directed to the windshield through theoutlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also

directed to the front door windows through the sidewindow demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to thefloor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.

through vents under the frodelivered to defrost while in fcan be maintained.

Bi-LevelAir flows both through the outlets located in the

instrument panel and those located on the floor. Airflows through the registers in the back of the centerconsole, and under the front seats to the rear seatpassengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.The center console outlets deliver conditioned air whilethe floor outlets deliver heated air.

PanelAir flows through the outlets located in the instru-

ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.These registers can be closed to block airflow.

outlets selected on the modeincludes an LED that illumina

is selected.

NOTE: To manually contromode selector must be moved

RecirculationThis button can be odors, dust, high huis desired. The “Re

only be used tempoan LED that illuminates, whicculation” mode is active. Yseparately







Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning onand off during manual operation only. Condi-tioned outside air is then directed through the

separately.

NOTE: Extended use of recwindows to fog. If the interiofog, press the “Recirculate” bair. Some temperature/humi

captured interior air to condense on windows and ham-per visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow

“Recirculation” mode to be selected while in the defrostor defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use Recirculationwhile in these modes will cause the LED in the button to

blink and then turn off.

Operating Tips

Window FoggingWindows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside

the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cooltemperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,turning the air conditioning (pressing the snowflakebutton) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature

control and blower speed to blower speeds will reduce fo

the windshield can be quicklydefrost mode.

Regular cleaning of the insidnon-filming cleaning solutionvery well) will help prevensmoke, perfumes, etc.) fromContaminates increase the rat

Summer OperationAir conditioned vehicles musquality antifreeze coolant, durproper corrosion protection an

UNDERSTANDING YOU






button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperaturecontrol, air direction, and blower speed to maintaincomfort.

As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary todirect air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature

proper corrosion protection anof the coolant for protection aconcentration is recommendecants, and Genuine Parts incoolant type.

When using the air conditioner in extremely heavytraffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,

additional engine cooling may be required. If this situa-tion is encountered, operate the transmission in a lowergear to increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed.When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary toshift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightlyfor fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fanspeed.

Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an

automatic recirculation system. When the system sensesa heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partialRecirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.

Winter OperationWhen operating the system d

make sure the air intake, locawindshield, is free of iceobstructions.

Vacation StorageAnytime you store your vehic(i.e. vacation) for two weeks otioning system at idle for abouair and high blower setting.

system lubrication to minimipressor damage when the sys







Operating Tips Chart

UNDERSTANDING YOU











STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below Ϫ20°F Or

Ϫ29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

▫ After Starting 282

▫ Brake/Transmission Shif

▫ Brake/Transmission InterOverride . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Five–Speed Automatic Tr▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . .

▫ Rocking The Vehicle






▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

▫ Normal Starting — Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . 282

Ⅵ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 285

Ⅵ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

▫ Rocking The Vehicle . .

Ⅵ Four-Wheel Drive Operatio

▫ Quadra-Trac I OperatingInstructions/Precautions

▫ Quadra-Trac II OperatingInstructions/Precautions — If Equipped . . . . 297

▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

▫ Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped . . . . 301

Ⅵ On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Ⅵ Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

▫When To Use 4WD Low Range — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Ⅵ Power Steering . . . . . . .

▫ Power Steering Fluid Che

Ⅵ Parking Brake . . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Anti-Lock Brake System .

Ⅵ Electronic Brake Control Sy

▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake Sy

▫ TCS (Traction Control Sy

▫ BAS (Brake Assist System

▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mit

▫ ESP (Electronic Stability P

276 STARTING AND OPERATING






▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 303

▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫ ESP (Electronic Stability P

▫ TSC (Trailer Sway Contro

▫ HSA (Hill Start Assist) (4NV245 Two–Speed Trans

▫ HDC (Hill Descent Control) (4WD ModelsWith NV245 Two–Speed Transfer

Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCSIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Ⅵ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 330

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 331

Ⅵ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

▫ Tire Pressure 335

▫ Compact Spare Tire — If

▫ Limited-Use Spare — If E

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . .

▫ Tread Wear Indicators .

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . .

▫ Replacement Tires . . . .

Ⅵ Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Tire Rotation Recommenda

Ⅵ Tire Pressure Monitor Syste

▫ Base System

STAR






▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 337

▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

▫ Base System . . . . . . . .

▫ Premium System — If Eq

▫ General Information . .

Ⅵ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

▫ 3.7 And 4.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 357

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings 359

▫ E-85 General Information

▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . .

▫ Fuel Requirements . . .

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil FVehicles (E-85) And Gaso

▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Cruising Range . . . . . .

▫ Replacement Parts . . .

Ⅵ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . .

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap







▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Ⅵ Fuel Requirements (Diesel Engines) . . . . . . . . . 360

Ⅵ Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Ⅵ Vehicle Loading . . . . . .

▫ Certification Label . . .

Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

▫ Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . 375

▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Ⅵ Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Recreational Towing(Behind Motorhome, Etc.)

▫ Towing – 2WD Models

▫ Towing — Quadra-Trac ITransfer Case) 4WD Mod

▫ Towing — Quadra–Trac III 4WD Models . . . . .

STAR






STARTING PROCEDUREBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the

inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat

belts.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingunattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key inthe ignition. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave animals or children inside parked

Normal Starting

Tip Start

NOTE: Normal starting ofengine is obtained without paccelerator pedal.

Do not press the accelerator. UKey to briefly turn the igniposition and release it as soonstarter motor will continue to

automatically when the enginfails to start, the starter will d10 seconds. If this occurs, turnLOCK position, wait 10 to 15







• Do not leave animals or children inside parkedvehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup maycause serious injury or death.

LOCK position, wait 10 to 15normal starting procedure.

Extremely Cold Weather (Below Ϫ20°F or Ϫ29°C)To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids intothe throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt tostart the vehicle. This could result in a flash firecausing serious personal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING! (

•

Do not attempt to push oit started. Vehicles equiptransmission cannot be stafuel could enter the catathe engine has started, converter and vehicle. Icharged battery, booster obtain a start from a boosin another vehicle. This

gerous if done improperproper jump-starting procarefully.

STAR






If the engine fails to start aft“Normal Starting” or “Extredures, it may be flooded. To cthe accelerator pedal all the w

Then, turn the ignition switch

release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motorwill disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this

occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, thenrepeat the normal starting procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-onds before trying again.

After StartingThe idle speed is controlled automatically and it willdecrease as the engine warms up.

Normal Starting Diesel Engines

• Low Oil Pressure Light is o

Cold Weather PrecautionsOperation in ambient temperarequire special considerationsgests these options.

*No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diese







Normal Starting — Diesel Engines

Observe the following when the engine is operating.

• All message center lights are off.

• Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.

be used where extended arctiexist.

NOTE:• Use of Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel or Number 1

ULSD Diesel Fuel results in a noticeable decrease infuel economy.

• Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel is a blend of Number 2ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuels, which re-duces the temperature at which wax crystals form infuel.

NOTE: This engine requires the use of “Ultra LowSulfur Diesel Fuel.” Use of incorrect fuel could result inexhaust system damage. Refer to “Fuel Requirements” inthis section for further details on fuel recommendations.

Battery Blanket Usage

blankets will greatly increasetemperatures. Suitable batte

from your authorized MOPAREngine Starting Procedure

WARN

NEVER pour fuel or other fair inlet opening in an atteThis could result in a flapersonal injury.

1. The shift lever must be inposition before you can start

STAR






y gA battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the batterytemperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C). For the same de-crease in temperature, the engine requires twice as muchpower to crank at the same RPM. The use of battery

2. Turn the ignition key to the

3. Watch for the “Wait To Stacluster. Refer to “Instrument Cmanual. It will glow for two

depending on engine temperature. When the “Wait ToStart” goes out, the engine is ready to start.

4. Tip Start FeatureDo not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with IntegratedKey (FOBIK) to briefly turn the ignition switch to theSTART position and then release it. The starter motor willcontinue to run, and it will automatically disengagewhen the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, thestarter will disengage automatically in 20 seconds. Thestarter can be disengaged by turning the ignition key to

the OFF position, if required.5. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for approxi-mately 30 seconds before driving. This allows oil tocirculate and lubricate the turbocharger

Incomplete combustion allowform on piston rings and i

unburned fuel can enter the and causing rapid wear to the

Engine Warm-UpAvoid full throttle operationWhen starting a cold engineoperating speed slowly to astabilize as the engine warms

NOTE: High-speed, no-loadcan result in excessive whiteperformance. No-load enginunder 1,200 RPM during the win cold ambient temperature c







circulate and lubricate the turbocharger.

Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling may be harmful toyour engine because combustion chamber temperaturescan drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.

in cold ambient temperature c

If temperatures are below 32°at moderate speeds for five mapplied.

Engine Idling - In Cold WeatherAvoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below

0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling may be harmful toyour engine because combustion chamber temperaturescan drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish toform on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, theunburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oiland causing rapid wear to the engine.

Stopping The Engine

Before turning off your turbo diesel engine, always allowthe engine to return to normal idle speed and run forseveral seconds. This assures proper lubrication of theturbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any

allow the lubricating oil and caway from the combustion c

components, and turbochargetant for turbocharged, charge

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER —

The engine block heater warmquicker starts in cold weather.a ground-fault interrupter pelectrical outlet with a grouncord.

Use the heater when temperatexpected to last for several da

The block heater must be plug

STAR






period of hard driving.

Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown.After full load operation, idle the engine three to fiveminutes before shutting it down. This idle period will

p ghave an adequate warming ef

The engine block heater cord

• 3.7L/4.7L Engine — coiled

oil dipstick tube.

• 5.7L Engine — bundled and fastened to the injectorharness.

• 3.0L Diesel Engine — on the passenger side of thevehicle, mounted on a stud between the fresh airboxand coolant reservoir.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord couldcause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIO

CAUTIDamage to the transmissioning precautions are not obse

• Shift into PARK only aftea complete stop.

• Shift into or out of Rvehicle has come to a comis at idle speed.

• Do not shift from REVERinto any forward gear widle speed.

• Before shifting into any g







Before shifting into any gis firmly on the brake pe

WARNING!

It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idlespeed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock SystemThis system prevents you from moving the shift lever outof PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal ispressed. This system is active only while the ignition

Brake/Transmission InterloYour vehicle may be equippe

override. The manual overridthat the shift lever should failthe key in the ON position pressed. To operate the shift lform the following steps:

1. Turn the key to the ON poengine.

2. Firmly set the parking brak

3. Using a flat blade screwdrshift lock manual override covPRNDL bezel.

STAR






pressed. This system is active only while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position. Always depress the brakepedal first, before moving the shift lever out of PARK.

4. Depress and maintain firpedal.

5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual overrideopening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.

Have your vehicle inspecteddealer, if the shift lock manua

Five–Speed Automatic TraThe electronically controlledprecise shift schedule. The trself-calibrating; therefore, thevehicle, may be somewhat condition, and precision shiftshundred miles/kilometers.

Gear Ranges

NOTE: After selecting any geallow the selected gear to eThis is especially important wth i d t t t th

Interlock Manual Override







6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

there is a need to restart the ekey to the LOCK position befogear engagement may be deengine if the key is not cycled

te oc a ua O e de

PARKThis gear position supplements the parking brake by

locking the transmission. The engine can be started inthis range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is inmotion. Apply the parking brake when leaving thevehicle in this range. Always apply the parking brakefirst, then place the shift lever into the PARK position.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for

the parking brake. Always apply parking brakefully when parked to guard against vehicle move-ment and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (

• It is dangerous to move thor NEUTRAL if the engiidle speed. If your foot ispedal, the vehicle could acor in reverse. You could land hit someone or somgear when the engine is idyour right foot is firmly o

REVERSEUse this range only after thcomplete stop.

NEUTRAL

STAR






NEUTRALShift into NEUTRAL when tprolonged periods with the emay be started in this range. Smust leave the vehicle.

NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for anyother reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result

in severe transmission damage. Refer to “RecreationalTowing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” inSection 6 of this manual.

DRIVEShift into DRIVE only when the vehicle is at a completestop and the brakes are firmly applied. The transmissionautomatically upshifts through fifth gear. The DRIVEposition provides optimum driving characteristics under

all normal operating conditions.Electronic Range Select (ERS)OperationThe Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allowsyou to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the

shifts the transmission into ERmission will never shift abov

down to 2 (second) or 1 (first)NOTE:• If you pull and hold (not ta

(-), the transmission will dothat can be attained withouThe display will show thewill limit the top gear to th

• If you pull and hold (not tap

(+), the transmission will eand shift to the appropriateЉDЉ.

3 7L and 3 0L Diesel Engine







y ( ) g ( )shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing you to limitthe highest available gear. For example, if the driver

3.7L and 3.0L Diesel EngineWhen in the DRIVE position,will shift down one gear and example, if you are in DRIVEyou tap the shift lever one

transmission will downshift to 4th gear and the displaywill show 4. Another tap to the left (-) will shift the

transmission into 3rd gear.4.7L and 5.7L EngineOn vehicles equipped with 4.7L or 5.7L engines, use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additionalunderdrive gear which is not normally used duringthrough-gear accelerations. This additional gear im-proves vehicle performance and cooling capability whentowing a trailer on certain grades. ERS 1,2, and 3 are

underdrive gears; ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 (Overdrive)is the same as the normal 4th gear. When in the DRIVEposition in 1st through 4th gear, the first tap to the left (-),will display the ERS designation for the current gear (thetransmission will not downshift) For example if you are

gear). When in the DRIVE potap to the left (-) will downs

display 5 (ERS 5 is the same astap to the left (-) will shift the 4 (direct gear).

WARN

Do not downshift for additislippery surface. The drivegrip and the vehicle could s

Screen Display 1 2

Actual Gear(s)Allowed

1 1-2

STAR






transmission will not downshift). For example, if you arein DRIVE and are in 3rd (direct) gear, when you tap theshift lever one time to the left (-), the display will show 4(ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap to the left (-) will shiftthe transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive

* Applies to vehicles equipponly.

NOTE: To select the proper g

deceleration (engine braking),

left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift tothe range from which the vehicle can best be slowed

down.Overdrive OperationThe automatic transmission includes an electronicallycontrolled Overdrive (5th gear for 3.7L and 3.0L dieselengine, 4th and 5th gears for 4.7L and 5.7L engines). Thetransmission will automatically shift to Overdrive, if thefollowing conditions are present:

• the transmission selector is in DRIVE;

• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-perature;

• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph

• transmission has reactemperature.

NOTE: If the vehicle is startperatures, the transmission mand will automatically select operation at this temperaturresume when the transmissirisen to a suitable level. Reftorque converter clutch, later

During cold temperature ope

layed upshifts, depending ontemperature. This feature impthe engine and transmission.

If the transmission temperatu







(48 km/h);

• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;

If the transmission temperatutransmission will automaticalgear for operation at this temptemperature becomes hot enou

OVER TEMP” message may display, and the transmis-sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis-

sion cools down. After cool down, the transmission willresume normal operation.

In high ambient temperatures with sustained high enginespeed and load, an upshift, followed shortly thereafter bya downshift, may occur. The TOW/HAUL light will turnoff. This is a normal part of the overheat protectionstrategy when operating in the TOW/HAUL mode.

The transmission will downshift from Overdrive, to the

most desirable gear, if the accelerator pedal is fullydepressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph(56 km/h).

When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode — If Equipped

overheating or failure due tooperating in TOW/HAUL m

shift into direct gear and Ounder steady cruise condition

STAR






When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode — If EquippedWhen driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improveperformance and reduce the potential for transmission

The “TOW/HAUL” indicator instrument cluster to indicate

TOW/HAU

activated. Pressing the switch a second time restoresnormal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,

the switch must be pressed each time the engine isstarted.

Transmission Limp Home ModeTransmission function is monitored for abnormal condi-tions. If a condition is detected that could result intransmission damage, the transmission limp home modewill be engaged. In this mode, the transmission willremain in the current gear (3.7L and 3.0L diesel engine) or

in direct gear (4.7L and 5.7L engines) until the vehicle is brought to a stop.

To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:

1 Stop the vehicle

4. Wait approximately 10 secgine.

5. Move the shift lever to the

If the problem is no longer detreturn to normal operation.PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRate. Only 2nd gear (3.7L and gear (4.7L and 5.7L enginesDRIVE position. Have the traauthorized dealer as soon as p

Torque Converter ClutchA feature, designed to improvincluded in the automatic tranA clutch within the torque co







1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.

3. Turn the engine off, and be sure to turn the key to theLOCK position.

A clutch within the torque cocally, at a calibrated speed, at higher speeds under heavier sult in a slightly different fenormal operation in high gea

drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. The

feature is operational in Overdrive and in DRIVE.NOTE:• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the

transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-ally after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].Because the engine speed is higher when the torqueconverter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if thetransmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.

This is normal. Manually shifting (using the ERS shiftcontrol) between 4 (direct gear) and 5/D (Overdrivegear) positions will demonstrate that the transmissionis able to shift into and out of Overdrive. For vehicleswith 4.7L or 5.7L engines (which have two Overdrive

• If the vehicle has not been first few seconds of operati

mission into gear may seemfluid partially draining fromthe transmission. This condcause damage to the transverter will refill within fivPARK into any other gear p

Rocking The VehicleIf the vehicle becomes stuck in

often be moved by a rocking m between DRIVE and REVERpressure to the accelerator.

NOTE: The Electronic StabT i C l (if i

STAR






with 4.7L or 5.7L engines (which have two Overdrivegears), the transmission may not shift into the topOverdrive gear (normal 5th gear) until the transmis-sion fluid and engine coolant are warm.

Traction Control (if equippe before attempting to rock the vBrake Control System” in Sec

The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or

racing the engine, is most effective. Racing the engine orspinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeingthe vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating andfailure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever inNEUTRAL for at least one minute after every fiverocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheatingand reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

CAUTION!

When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between“First” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels fasterthan 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPE

Quadra-Trac I Operating

Instructions/Precautions —The Quadra-Trac I is a singtransfer case, which provides wheel drive. No driver interacTraction Control System (BTCABS and Traction Control, pwheel that is slipping to allowto wheels with traction.

NOTE: The Quadra-Trac Ifor conditions where 4WD LORefer to “Off-Road Driving Ti







than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage mayresult.

Quadra-Trac II OperatingInstructions/Precautions — If Equipped

The Quadra-Trac II

transfer case is fully automatic in thenormal driving 4WD HI mode. The Quadra-Trac II

transfer case provides three mode positions — 4WD HI,NEUTRAL, and 4WD LOW.

This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.

When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOWposition can be used to lock the front and rear driveshaftstogether and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at

the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended forloose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WDLOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may causeincreased tire wear and damage to driveline components.

Proper operation of four-wheon tires of equal size, type, a

wheel. Any difference will adcause damage to the transfer

Because four-wheel drive prthere is a tendency to exceed speeds. Do not go faster than

WARN

You or others could be in

vehicle unattended with th(Neutral) position without parking brake. The transfer disengages both the front ath t i d ill ll

STAR






When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the enginespeed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HIposition at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeedthe engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

the powertrain and will allregardless of the transmissibrake should always be apnot in the vehicle.

Shift Positions

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

4WD HIAll roads surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, sand, and dryhard pavement.

NEUTRALDisengages both the front and rear driveshafts from thepowertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another

vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Section 5 of this manual.

4WD LOWLow speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front and reardriveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to

Shifting Procedures

4WD HI to 4WD LOW

With the vehicle at speeds ofkey ON or engine running, sNEUTRAL, and raise the tr“4WD LOW” indicator light will begin to flash and remaincomplete. Release the T-hand

NOTE: If shift conditions/intransfer case motor tempera

exists, a “CHECK SHIFT PROflash from the EVIC (Electroniter). Refer to “Electronic Ve(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this m







driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maxi-mum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfacesonly. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

4WD LOW to 4WD HIWith the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),key ON or engine running shift the transmission into

“4WD LOW” indicator light will flash and go out when thethe T-handle.

NOTE:• If shift conditions/interlock

case motor temperature pr“CHECK SHIFT PROCEDfrom the EVIC (Electronic VRefer to “Electronic Veh(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this

•

Shifting into or out of 4WDvehicle completely stoppeoccur due to the mating clerly aligned. Several attemclutch teeth alignment and

Shifter T-Handle

STAR






key ON or engine running, shift the transmission intoNEUTRAL, and raise the transfer case T-handle. The

clutch teeth alignment andThe preferred method is w3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If ththan 3 mph (5 km/h), the tthe shift.

NEUTRAL Shift Procedure

1. Key ON, engine off.

2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.

3. Place transmission into NEUTRAL.

4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,etc.) for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switchstarts to blink indicating shift in progress. The lamp willstop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift iscomplete. A “4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will

display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. 5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift

NOTE: If shift conditions/

Neutral S







“CHECK SHIFT PROCEDUREthe EVIC (Electronic Vehicle to “Electronic Vehicle InformSection 4 of this manual.

Quadra-Drive II System — If EquippedThe optional Quadra-Drive II System features threetorque transfer couplings. The couplings include ELSD(Electronic Limited-Slip Differential) front and rear axlesand Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The optional ELSDaxles are fully automatic and require no driver input tooperate. Under normal driving conditions, the unitsfunction as standard axles, balancing torque evenly be-tween left and right wheels. With a traction difference

between left and right wheels, the coupling will sense aspeed difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than

the other, torque will automatically transfer from thewheel that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction.While the transfer case and axle couplings differ indesign, their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-TracII transfer case shifting information preceding this

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPSUtility vehicles have highernarrower track to make them wide variety of off-road apcharacteristics give them a hiordinary cars.

An advantage of the higher gview of the road, allowing yoThey are not designed for cornconventional two-wheel drivlow-slung sports cars are desirily in off-road conditions. If aturns or abrupt maneuvers. Atype, failure to operate this vehloss of control or vehicle rollo

STAR






II transfer case shifting information, preceding thissection, for shifting this system.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air

dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached tothe lower front fascia with quarter turn fasteners, and can

be removed by hand.

When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped

When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additionaltraction. This range should be limited to extreme situa-tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additionallow speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in

excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in4WD LOW range.

Driving Through Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

CAUTI

When driving through wat(8 km/h). Always check watas a precaution, and check aing through water may causcovered by the new vehicle

Driving through water mocentimeters deep will requirsafety and prevent damage to

drive through water, try to de bottom condition (and locatioentering. Proceed with cauticontrolled speed less than 5 mto minimize wave effects







water, there are a number of precautions that must beconsidered before entering the water.

to minimize wave effects.

Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in stormrun-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedesand/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must crossflowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). Theflowing water can erode the streambed causing yourvehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)that are downstream of your entry point to allow fordrifting.

Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimizewave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water isless than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Maintenance

transfer case) to assure the flunated. Contaminated fluid (mshould be flushed/changed avent component damage.

Driving In Snow, Mud AndIn heavy snow, when pullingcontrol at slower speeds, shifgear and shift the transfer caseRefer to “Four-Wheel Drive ODo not shift to a lower gear tforward motion. Over-revvinwheels and traction will be lo

Avoid abrupt downshifts oncause engine braking may ccontrol.

STAR






MaintenanceAfter driving through deep water, inspect your vehiclefluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,

control.

Hill Climbing

NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the

conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to alower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Usefirst gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.

If you stall or begin to lose forward motion whileclimbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stopand immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,allowing the compression braking of the engine to helpregulate your speed. If the brakes are required to controlvehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking orskidding the tires.

WARN

If the engine stalls, you lcannot make it to the top never attempt to turn arountipping and rolling the vehfully straight down a hill iback down a hill in NEUTR

Remember, never drive diagodrive straight up or down.

If the wheels start to slip as yhill, ease off the accelerator an

by turning the front wheels sfresh “bite” into the surface

i l h li b







traction to complete the climb

Traction DownhillShift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfercase into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowlydown the hill with all four wheels turning against enginecompression drag. This will permit you to control thevehicle speed and direction.

When descending mountains or hills, repeated brakingcan cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoidrepeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-sion whenever possible.

After Driving Off-RoadOff-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle thandoes most on-road driving. After going off-road, it isalways a good idea to check for damage. That way youcan get any problems taken care of right away and have

• Completely inspect the unCheck tires, body structureexhaust system for damage

• Check threaded fasteners fothe chassis, drivetrain compension. Retighten them, if values specified in the Serv

• Check for accumulations things could be a fire hazardto fuel lines, brake hose

propeller shafts.

• After extended operation similar dirty conditions, h

brake linings, and axle yokeibl

STAR






g y p g yyour vehicle ready when you need it.

soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may causeexcessive wear or unpredictable braking. You mightnot have full braking power when you need it toprevent an accident. If you have been operating yourvehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checkedand cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving inmud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for

impacted material. Impacted material can cause awheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it willcorrect the situation.

POWER STEERING

If for some reason the power still be possible to steer your vtions, you will observe a subseffort, especially at very low parking maneuvers.

NOTE: Increased noise levelwheel travel are considered nthat there is a problem with t

Upon initial start-up in cold wpump may make noise for a sh

due to the cold, thick fluid innoise should be considered noway damage the steering syst







The standard power steering system will give you goodvehicle response and increased ease of maneuverabilityin tight spaces. The system will provide mechanicalsteering capability if power assist is lost.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steeringassist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the endof the steering wheel travel will increase the steeringfluid temperature and it should be avoided when

possible. Damage to the power steering pump mayoccur.

Power Steering Fluid Check

The power steering system requires the use of

WARN

Do not use Automatic Tranother types of power steerinthe power steering system othe power steering system cthe wrong power steering fl

Checking the power steeringservice interval is not requiredchecked if a leak is suspec

apparent, and/or the system ipated. Coordinate inspectionrized dealer.

STAR






p g y qMOPARHydraulic System Power Steering (P/N05142893AA) or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Mate-rial Standard MS-10838.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface andwith the engine off to prevent injury from movingparts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Donot overfill. Use only manufacturers recommendedpower steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicatedlevel. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from allsurfaces.

PARKING BRAKE

To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly aspossible. When the parking brake is applied with theignition ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument

l t ill li ht T l th ki b k ll

NOTE: The Brake Warning Lparking brake is applied. It doof brake application.

Parking







cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull upslightly, press the center button, then lower the levercompletely.

Be sure the parking brake is fithe shift lever is in the PARK a hill, you should apply the pa

the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on thetransmission locking mechanism may make it difficult tomove the shift lever out of PARK.

WARNING!

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damageor injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmissionin PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle toroll and cause damage or injury.

• Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dan-gerous for a number of reasons. A child or otherscould be injured. Children should be warned notto touch the parking brake or the shift lever. Donot leave the key in the ignition. A child couldoperate power windows other controls or move

WARNING! (

• Be sure the parking br

before driving, failure toproblems due to excessbrakes.

When parking on a hill, turn tcurb on a downhill grade, anduphill grade.

The parking brake should alw

the driver is not in the vehicl

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEThe Anti-Lock Brake System (driver in maintaining vehic

STAR






operate power windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

(Continued)

braking conditions. The systemcomputer to modulate hydr

wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slipperysurfaces.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size andtype, and tires must be properly inflated, to produceaccurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!

Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixingsizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to lossof braking effectiveness.

The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brakewhile this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedalmovement. The movement can be more apparent on ice

The ABS pump motor runs du(20 km/h) and during an ABmakes a low humming noise

normal.

WARN

• Pumping of the Anti-Lotheir effectiveness and mPumping makes the stopppress firmly on your brakto slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent ics from acting on the vebraking or steering effiforded by the condition otires or the traction afford







and snow. This is normal. tires or the traction afford


• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns,following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful drivercan prevent accidents.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner, which could jeopardize the user’s safetyor the safety of others.

CAUTION!

The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects ofelectronic interference caused by improperly in-

t ll d ft k t di t l h

NOTE: During severe braksensation may occur and a cliThis is normal, indicating tha

• Do not “ride” the brakes bpedal. This could overheaunpredictable braking acttances, or brake damage.

• When descending mountaiing can cause brake fade wAvoid repeated heavy bra

transmission or locking ousible.

• Engines may idle at higherwhich could cause rear whloss of vehicle control. B

STA






stalled aftermarket radios or telephones. loss of vehicle control. Bdriving on slippery roads, iing, parking, or stopping.

• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especiallywhen roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can

build up between the tire tread and the road. This

hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, brakingability, and control.

• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakesmay become wet, resulting in decreased performanceand unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes bygentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at veryslow speeds.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic

brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock BrakeSystem), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (BrakeAssist System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation), and

Also, your vehicle is equippeControl) and, if it has 4WD wtransfer case, HSA (Hill Sta

Descent Control).

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake Sys

This system aids the driver in munder adverse braking condihydraulic brake pressure to phelp avoid skidding on slippeRefer to “Anti-Lock Brake Sy

manual.







ESP (Electronic Stability Program). All five of thesesystems work together to enhance vehicle stability andcontrol in various driving conditions.

WARNING!

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailingroad conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents, in-cluding those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-

less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize theuser’s safety or the safety of others.

TCS (Traction Control System)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of

stability. A feature of the TCS a limited-slip differential andacross a driven axle. If one

spinning faster than the other brake of the spinning wheel. Ttorque to be applied to the wThis feature remains active eeither the “Partial Off” or “Ful(Electronic Stability Programinformation.

BAS (Brake Assist System

The BAS is designed to optimcapability during emergencysystem detects an emergency ing the rate and amount of bapplies optimum pressure to

STAR






y pthe driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brakepressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and enginepower is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and

pp p preduce braking distances. Thanti-lock brake system (ABS).quickly results in the best BAS

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedalis released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natu-ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor canit increase the traction afforded by prevailing roadconditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns, drivingon very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only asafe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-dents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehiclemust never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

ERM (Electronic Roll MitigThis system anticipates the pmonitoring the driver’s stee

speed of the vehicle. When ERof change of the steering wheare sufficient to potentially applies the brake of the approreduce engine power to lessenwill occur. ERM will only interevasive driving maneuvers.

ERM can only reduce the cha

during severe or evasive drivprevent wheel lift due to oconditions, leaving the roadother vehicles.







p gmanner which could jeopardize the user’s safety orthe safety of others.

NOTE: Anytime the ESP system is in the “Full Off”mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to ESP (Electronic StabilityProgram) for a complete explanation of the available ESP

modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-tions and driving conditions, influence the chancethat wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannotprevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially thosethat involve leaving the roadway or striking objects

or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillfuldriver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of anERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

ESP (Electronic Stability P

This system enhances directio

the vehicle under various drrects for oversteering or undeapplying the brake of the appcounteracting the oversteer orgine power may also be redmaintain the desired path.

ESP uses sensors in the vehiclpath intended by the driver an

path of the vehicle. When the the intended path, ESP appliesate wheel to assist in counundersteer condition.

• Oversteer - when the veh

STAR






y yappropriate for the steering

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less thanappropriate for the steering wheel position.

The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the instrumentcluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction andthe ESP system becomes active. The ESP/TCS IndicatorLight also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCSIndicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, easeup on the accelerator and apply as little throttle aspossible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to theprevailing road conditions.

WARN

ESP (Electronic Stability Pro

natural laws of physics fronor can it increase the tractioroad conditions. ESP cannocluding those resulting frturns, driving on very slipplaning. Only a safe, attentivprevent accidents. The cequipped vehicle must nev

less or dangerous manner wuser’s safety or the safety o

The ESP system has three ava4WD HIGH range, two avai2WD vehicles and one oper







2WD vehicles, and one operrange.

High Range (4WD Models) or 2WD Models

On

This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD HIGHrange and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle isstarted or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGHrange, the ESP system will be in this “On” mode. Thismode should be used for most driving situations. ESPshould only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modefor specific reasons as noted below.

Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESPOFF switch. When in ЉPartial Off Љ mode, the TCS portionof ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature described inthe TCS section, has been disabled and the ESP/TCSIndicator Light will be illuminated All other stability

conditions and more wheel smally allow is required to gaiagain, momentarily depress

will restore the normal “ESP O

ESP OFF

STAR






Indicator Light will be illuminated. All other stabilityfeatures of ESP function normally. This mode is intendedto be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel

ESP OFF

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when drivingwith snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, orgravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”

mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situationrequiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode isovercome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressingthe ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicleis in motion.

Full Off (4WD Models Only)This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road usewhen ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-

verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered bydepressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for fiveseconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine isrunning. After five seconds, the ESP/TCS Indicator Lightwill illuminate, and the “ESP OFF” message will appear

In this mode, ESP and TCS, exfeature described in the TCS sthe vehicle reaches a speed

40 mph (64 km/h), the systemode, described above. Whe

below 35 mph (56 km/h), theis deactivated at low vehicleinterfere with off-road drivingto provide the stability featur(64 km/h). The ESP/TCS Indilluminated when ESP is of

momentarily depress the ESrestore the normal “ESP On”

NOTE: The “ESP OFF” mesaudible chime will sound, whin the PARK position from an







in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”in Section 4 of this manual for more information.

moved out of the PARK positthe message was previously c

WARNING!

With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle

stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. Inan emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERMsystems will not engage to assist in maintainingstability. The “Full Off” ESP mode is intended foroff-road use only.

4WD Low Range

Full Off

This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOWrange. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOWrange, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, theESP system will be in this “Full Off” mode. In 4WD LOW

ESP d TCS f h “li i d li ” f

(64 km/h), the normal ESP staTCS remains off. When the v35 mph (56 km/h), the ESP

deactivated at low vehicle spethat it will not interfere withfunction returns to provide thabove 40 mph (64 km/h). Thewill always be illuminated in 4is off.

NOTE: The “ESP OFF” mesaudible chime will sound, wh

in the PARK position from anmoved out of the PARK positthe message was previously c

STAR






range, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip” featuredescribed in the TCS section, are turned off until thevehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph

WARNING!

With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle

stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. Inan emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERMsystems will not engage to assist in maintainingstability. The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-road use only.

TSC (Trailer Sway Control)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-

sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriateactions to attempt to stop the sway. The system mayreduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSCwill become active automatically once an excessivelyswaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-

follow the trailer tongue weigto “Trailer Towing” in SectioTSC is functioning, the ESP/

flash, the engine power mayfeel the brakes being appliedattempt to stop the trailer fromwhen the ESP system is in themodes.

WARN

If TSC activates while dr

down, stop at the nearest saftrailer load to eliminate trai

HSA (Hill Start Assist) (4W

Two–Speed Transfer Case Th HSA t i d i d







swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers fromswaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and

The HSA system is designedstarting a vehicle from a stop othe level of brake pressure the

period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttleduring this short period of time, the system will release

brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. Thesystem will release brake pressure in proportion toamount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move inthe intended direction of travel.

HSA Activation CriteriaThe following criteria must be met in order for HSA toactivate:

•

Vehicle must be stopped.• Vehicle must be on a 8% grade or greater hill.

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

HSA will work in REVERSE athe activation criteria have beeactivate if the vehicle is placed

WARN

There may be situations on m8%), with a loaded vehicle, owhen the system will not acmay occur. This could causevehicle or object. Always responsible for braking the

Towing with HSAHSA will provide assistancewhen pulling a trailer.

STAR






g p g )

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your

trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated anddeactivated with the brake switch. If so, when thebrake pedal is released there may not be enoughbrake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on ahill and this could cause a collision with anothervehicle or object behind you. In order to avoidrolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-

ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driveris responsible for braking the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (

• HSA is not a parking brak

on a hill without puttiPARK and using the padown the hill and couldanother vehicle or object.the parking brake while pthe driver is responsible

HSA OffIf you wish to turn off the H

using the Customer Programmtronic Vehicle Information Centronic Vehicle Information Centhis manual.







HDC (Hill Descent Control) (4WD Models WithNV245 Two–Speed Transfer Case Only)

HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills

during off-road driving situations and is available in4WD LOW range only. To enable HDC (transfer casemust be in 4WD LOW range), press the HDC switch. If the HDC switch is pressed when the vehicle is not in4WD LOW range, the light in the switch will flash for fiveseconds and HDC will not be enabled.

When HDC is properly enaDESCENT CONTROL” will alight in the switch will be illumatically apply the brakes t

Hill Descen

STAR






y pp ywhen necessary. HDC has the

and will only activate when the vehicle is descending ahill. It will usually not activate on level ground.

The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit thedriving conditions. The speed corresponds to the trans-mission gear selected.

• 1st = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

• 2nd = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• 3rd = 4 mph (6 km/h)

• 4th = 5.5 mph (9 km/h)

• 5th = 7.5 mph (12 km/h)

• REVERSE = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

• NEUTRAL = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• PARK = HDC will not function

HDC also has the capability twill automatically adjust to a(about 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) th

HDC operation can be overridto slow the vehicle down beloConversely, if more speed is dethe accelerator pedal will incusual manner. When either thereleased, HDC will control thnal set speed.

HDC is intended for low speAt vehicle speeds above 30 mplonger function. When the v30 mph (48 km/h), HDC furesume and the vehicle speed wspeed.







• PARK = HDC will not function

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-

ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The drivermust remain attentive to the driving conditions andis responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS Indicator

LightThe malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP iscombined with the BAS indicator. The ESP/BAS Warning Light and the ESP/TCS IndicatorLight in the instrument cluster both come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.They should both go out with the engine running.

If the ESP/BAS Warning Light comes on con-tinuously with the engine running a malfunc-

after several ignition cycles,driven several miles at spe(48 km/h), see your authorized

to have the problem diagnose

NOTE:• ЉThe ESP/TCS Indicator

Warning Light come on mignition switch is turned O

• Each time the ignition is tuwill be ON even if it was p

• The ESP Control System wisounds when it is active. Twill stop when ESP becommaneuver that caused the E

STAR






tinuously with the engine running, a malfunc-tion has been detected in either the ESP or theBAS system, or both. If this light remains on

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:• P (Passenger) - Metric tir

design standards. P-Metri

molded into the sidewall ption. Example: P215/65R15

• European-Metric tire sizindesign standards. Tires desithe tire size molded into ththe section width. The lettersize designation. Example:

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tdesign standards. The sizetires is the same as for P-Mletters “LT” that are moldeing the size designation. Ex1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-

dards Code (TIN)4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure3 S i D i ti 6 T d T ti d







3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction andTemperature Grades

• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compactspares designed for temporary emergency use only.Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing standards and it begins witinto the sidewall. Example:

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards

....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT = Temporary spare tire

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section width of tire

STAR






— Ratio of section height to section width of tire

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

EXAMPLE:

R = Construction code

— ЉRЉ means radial construction

—ЉDЉ means diagonal or bias construction

15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can c

H = Speed Symbol

— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry

its load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol shouldspecified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, roposted speed limits)







EXAMPLE:

Load Identification:

....blank.... = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Stand

Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire

Light Load = Light load tire

C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a s

Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to c

Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire tire

STAR






Tire Identification Number (TIN)The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including thedate code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outbotires as mounted on the vehiclethe outboard side, then you w

side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301DOT = Department of Transportation

— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Departmesafety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—01 means the year 2001







y— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one numin which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd w

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side B-Pillar.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you importthe:

1) number of people that can

2) total weight your vehicle c3) tire size designed for your

4) cold tire inflation pressurespare tires.

LoadingThe vehicle maximum load othe load carrying capacity of thwill not exceed the tire’s load

adhere to the loading conditiinflation pressures specified Information placard and in theof this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum

STAR






gross axle weight ratings (GAWTire and Loading Information Placard

axles must not be exceeded. For further information onGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of yourvehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs orXXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage andtrailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceedthe weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle

3. Subtract the combined weisengers from XXX lbs or XXX

4. The resulting figure equal

cargo and luggage load capacamount equals 1,400 lbs (635150 lb (68 kg) passengers in yavailable cargo and luggage(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750,[295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined w being loaded on the vehicle. Texceed the available cargo acalculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towitrailer will be transferred to manual to determine how t







passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.cargo and luggage load capac

NOTE:• The following table shows examples on how to calcu-

late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities

of your vehicle with varying seating configurationsand number and size of occupants. This table is forillustration purposes only and may not be accurate forthe seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following exampleoccupants and cargo shou(392 kg).

STAR












WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, andincrease your stopping distance. Use tires of therecommended load capacity for your vehicle. Neveroverload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire PressureProper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primaryareas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARN

• Improperly inflated tirescause accidents.

• Underinflation increases tin tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a shock. Objects on the road adamage that result in tire fa

• Unequal tire pressures c

lems. You could lose contro• Overinflated or underinfhicle handling and can failoss of vehicle control.

STAR







• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicleto the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the rightor left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-mended cold tire inflation pressure.

EconomyImproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wearpatterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormalwear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for

earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tirerolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

Ride Comfort and Vehicle StabilityProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can prodresponse or over responsiven

Unequal tire pressures can ca

able steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from svehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflationdriver’s side “B” Pillar.

The pressure should be check

inspected for signs of tire wearonce a month. Use a good qucheck tire pressure. Do not when determining proper inflaproperly inflated even when t







Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). Thiswill prevent moisture and dirt from entering thevalve stem, which could damage it.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are alwayscold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure isdefined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not beendriven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation

pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide rangeof outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary withtemperature changes.

Tire pressures change by appr12°F (7°C) of air temperature when checking tire pressure in

the winter.Example: If garage temperatoutside temperature = 32°Finflation pressure should be iwhich equals 1 psi (7 kPa) fooutside temperature condition

Tire pressure may increase froduring operation. DO NOT re

build-up, or your tire pressur

Tire Pressures For High Sp

The manufacturer advocateswithin posted speed limits. Wtions are such that the vehi

d i t i i t ti

STAR






speeds, maintaining correct tirimportant. Increased tire pre

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tiredealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading

and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle at or abovemaximum load is dangerous. The added strain onyour tires could cause them to fail. You could have aserious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to themaximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial-Ply Tires

WARN

Combining radial ply tires on your vehicle will causepoorly. The instability couways use radial tires in setsthem with other types of tir

Cuts and punctures in radial the tread area because of side

authorized dealer for radial tiCompact Spare Tire — If E

The compact spare is for tempradial tires. It is engineeredvehicle only. Since this tire horiginal tire should be repair







g pstalled at the first opportunity

WARNING!

Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.

With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limitedtread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wearindicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to bereplaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, whichapply to your spare. Failure to do so could result inspare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since thewheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheelon the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTI

Because of the reduced grou

your vehicle through an autcompact spare installed. Daresult.

Limited-Use Spare — If EqThe limited-use spare tire is use on your vehicle. This tireuse spare tire warning label spare tire and wheel assembly

original equipped tire on thevehicle, but it is not. Installatiotire affects vehicle handling. Sreplace (or repair) the originvehicle at the first opportunity

STAR






WARNING!

The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use

only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affectsvehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive morethan 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tireinflation pressure listed on either your tire placard orlimited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunityand reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so couldresult in loss of vehicle control.

Tire SpinningWhen stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do notspin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

WARN

Fast spinning tires can be d

ated by excessive wheel speage or failure. A tire could eone. Do not spin your veh35 mph (55 km/h) when youanyone near a spinning whspeed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in th

to help you in determining wreplaced.







These indicators are molded into the bottom of the treadgrooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the indicators appear intwo or more adjacent grooves the tire should be re

Many states have laws requirpoint.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire isfactors including but not limi

• Driving style

• Tire pressure

• Distance driven

WARN

Tires and the spare tire shoyears, regardless of the remfollow this warning can resuYou could lose control and hin serious injury or death.

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

STAR






two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be re-placed.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as littleexposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contactwith oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement TiresThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of manycharacteristics. They should be inspected regularly forwear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-lent to the originals in size, quality and performancewhen replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading

Information” placard for the size designation of yourtires. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to useequivalent replacement tires may adversely affect thesafety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommendthat you contact your original equipment or an autho-rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire

WARN

• Do not use a tire, wheel

that specified for your vehof unapproved tires and pension dimensions and tics, resulting in changes tbraking of your vehicle. Table handling and stresssion components. You couan accident resulting in Use only the tire and whe

approved for your vehicl• Never use a tire with a

capacity than what was your vehicle. Using a tire could result in tire overlcould lose control and ha







rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tirespecifications or capability.


• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires havingadequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different sizemay result in false speedometer and odometer read-ings.

TIRE CHAINSCertain models have sufficient tire-to-body clearance toallow use of tire chains. Install chains on rear tires only.Follow these recommendations to guard against damageand excessive tire and chain wear:

• Do not install tire chains hicles with larger than P23than this may not provide

with chains or other tractio• Use SAE class “S” tire chain

• Follow tire chain manufmounting chains.

• Install chains snugly and tiof driving.

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48

specified by the chain man

• Drive cautiously, avoiding extreme driving maneuver

STAR






TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONSTires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate atdifferent loads and perform different steering, handling,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear atunequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”shown in the following diagram.

These effects can be reduced The benefits of rotation are eaggressive tread designs such

type tires. Rotation will increatain mud, snow, and wet tractia smooth, quiet ride.

Follow the recommended tire type of driving. Refer to “MSection 8 of this manual. Mpermissible if desired. The unusual wear should be corre

performed.NOTE: The premium Tire Prautomatically locate the pressucorrect vehicle position follow







TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warnthe driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehiclerecommended cold tire pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (–11°C). This means that whenthe outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure willdecrease. Tire pressure should always be set based oncold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tirepressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a

three-hour period. Refer to the “Tires – General Infor-mation” in this section for information on how toproperly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure willalso increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal andthere should be no adjustment for this increased pres-sure.

The TPMS will warn the drivthe tire pressure falls below threshold for any reason, ineffects, or natural pressure los

The TPMS will continue to wpressure as long as the conditioff until the tire pressure is acold tire pressure. Once the low

been illuminated, the tire prethe recommended cold tire prPressure Monitoring Telltale

system will automatically upMonitoring Telltale Light widated tire pressures have beenneed to be driven for up to 2(24 km/h) to receive this info

STAR






For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) andthe measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera-ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure toapproximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure issufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may causethe tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),

but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been

inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressurevalue.

CAUTI

• The TPMS has been op

equipment tires and wheebeen established for the tivehicle. Undesirable sysdamage may result wequipment that is not of thstyle. Aftermarket wheelage. Do not use aftermarkbeads if your vehicle is eqdamage to the sensors ma

• After inspecting or adjualways reinstall the valprevent moisture and dirstem, which could damagtoring Sensor.







NOTE:• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tirefailure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gaugewhile adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight.

• Seasonal temperature changand the TPMS will monitorthe tire.

Base SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor Sytechnology with wheel rim-momonitor tire pressure levels. wheel as part of the valve stereadings to the Receiver Mod

NOTE: It is particularly impcheck the tire pressure in all of

the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the follo

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitor

• Tire Pressure Monitoring T

STAR






g• Tire Pressure Monitoring T

A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the sparewheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-sizespare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-sizespare tire can be used in place of any of the four roadtires. A low spare tire will not cause the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light to illuminate, a warning mes-sage to appear, or the chime to sound.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willilluminate in the instrument cluster, a “TIRE LOWPRESSURE” message will display in the instru-

ment cluster for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will beactivated, when one or more of the four active road tirepressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop assoon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tireon your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’srecommended cold placard pressure value. The systemwill automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-ing Telltale Light will extinguish, once the updated tire

pressures have been received. driven for up to 20 minutes areceive this information.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring and off for 75 seconds, andsystem fault is detected. In aSYSTEM” message will be dispa system fault is detected, andignition key is cycled, this seqing the system fault still existtoring Telltale Light will turn ono longer exists. A system faufollowing:

1. Jamming due to electronic facilities emitting the same Radsensors.

2. Installing some form of af







that affects radio wave signal

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheelhousings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE:• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size

spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressuremonitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event thatthe matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a lowpressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will stillshow the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to beON, a “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message will bedisplayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds, anda chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for up to20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Teof the road tires are belowthreshold.

• If your vehicle is not eqfull-size spare wheel and have a tire pressure monitorThe TPMS will not be able tIf you install the spare tire,has a pressure below the loupon the next ignition key c“TIRE LOW PRESSURE” mthe instrument cluster forPressure Monitoring Telltaldriving the vehicle for up to(25 km/h), the Tire Pressurwill flash on and off for 75 ssolid. In addition, a “CHECwill be displayed for 75 sec

STAR






ignition key cycle, a chim

TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for 75 sec-onds, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lightwill flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain onsolid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire,the TPMS will update automatically and the TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, aslong as no tire pressure is below the low-pressurewarning limit in any of the four active road tires. Thevehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutesabove 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS toreceive this information.

Premium System — If EquippedThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wirelesstechnology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors tomonitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to eachwheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressurereadings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly impcheck the tire pressure in all ofthe proper pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitor Sysfollowing components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitor

• Three Trigger Modules (mwheel wells)

• Various Tire Pressure Monwhich display in the ElectCenter (EVIC), and a graph

• Tire Pressure Monitoring T

A tire pressure monitoring sewheel, if the vehicle is equippe

h l d b







spare wheel and tire assemb

spare tire can be used in place of any of the four roadtires. A low spare tire will set the “SPARE LOW PRES-SURE” message, but it will not cause the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime tosound.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure WarningsThe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light willilluminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-dible chime will be activated, when one or more of

the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, theEVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages(Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for threeseconds, and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to “Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of thismanual.

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure unitsin PSI, kPa, or BAR.

Should a low tire condition active road tire(s), you shouldand inflate the low tire(s) that display to the vehicle’s recomThe system will automaticallplay of the pressure value(s) wTire Pressure Monitoring Tel

STAR






in PSI, kPa, or BAR. g

once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. Thevehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

CHECK TPM SYSTEM WarningThe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash onand off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when asystem fault is detected. The system fault will also sounda chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYS-TEM” message for three seconds. This message is thenfollowed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of thepressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Moni-toring Sensor(s) is not being received.

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure unitsin PSI, kPa, or BAR.







If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,providing the system fault still exists. If the system faultno longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight will no longer flash, the ЉCHECK TPM SYSTEMЉ

message will not be present, and a pressure value will bedisplayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur byany of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next tofacilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPMsensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheelhousings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

The EVIC will also display amessage for three seconds wtected possibly related to the case, the ЉCHECK TPM SYSTlowed by a graphic display, shown. This indicates the prereceived from the TPM Sensorneeds to be serviced as lonSYSTEMЉ message exists.

NOTE:• If your vehicle is equipped

spare wheel and tire assemmonitoring sensor, and canPressure Monitoring Systemthe matching full-size sparepressure road tire, the nextshow the Tire Pressure MonON, a chime to sound, a

i th EVIC d th

STAR






appear in the EVIC, and th

show the low tire pressure value “flashing.” Drivingthe vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) will turn OFF the Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light as long as none of road tires are belowthe low pressure warning threshold. The EVIC willalso display a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message,and the graphic display will show a tire pressure valuein place of the “flashing” low tire pressure value.

• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matchingfull-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does nothave a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire thathas a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,upon the next ignition key cycle, the Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime willsound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”pressure value in the graphic display. After driving thevehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)

the Tire Pressure Monitorinon and off for 75 seconds anaddition, the EVIC will SYSTEMЉ message for threedashes (- -) in place of thesubsequent ignition key cycTire Pressure Monitoring Tand off for 75 seconds andthe EVIC will display amessage for three seconds ain place of the pressure vreplace the original road t

vehicle in place of the spareautomatically.

In addition, the Tire Pressurewill turn OFF and the graphicnew pressure value instead oftire pressure is below the lowany of the four active road tire







vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), any of the four active road tire

be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

General Information

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of thefollowing licenses:

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.7 and 4.7L Engine

All engines (ex

signed to meetand provide experformance whleaded “regulartane rating of

gasoline is not recommended benefit over regular gasoline

5.7L Engine

The 5.7L enginemissions regultory fuel economusing high-qualing an octane rafacturer recomm

STAR






for optimum performance. The use of premium gasolineis not recommended, as it will not provide any benefitover regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful toyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock athigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service isrequired.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hardstarting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience thesesymptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-ering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide have issued andendorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel propertiesnecessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-fications if they are available

Reformulated GasolineMany areas of the country r

burning gasoline referred to as

Reformulated gasoline containcifically blended to reduce vprove air quality.

The manufacturer supports thline. Properly blended reformvide excellent performance anfuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blend

Some fuel suppliers blend ungenates such as 10% ethanol, Mates are required in some areawinter months to reduce carFuels blended with these oxyour vehicle.







fications, if they are available.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol. Use ofthese blends may result in starting and drivabilityproblems and may damage critical fuel system com-ponents.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, itdoes not have the negative effects of Methanol.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanolcontent may void the vehicle’s warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode

• OBD II “Malfunction Indic

• poor engine performance

• poor cold start and cold dr

• increased risk for fuel syste

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadE-85 perform the following:

• drain the fuel tank (see you

• change the engine oil and o

• disconnect and reconnectengine controller memory

More extensive repairs will bexposure to E-85 fuel.

MMT In GasolineMMT is a manganese containiblended into some gasoline to

STAR






• operate in a lean mode blended into some gasoline to

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number withoutMMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark pluglife and reduces emission system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasolinewithout MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT contentof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer if thegasoline contains MMT.

It is even more important to look for gasoline withoutMMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levelshigher than those allowed in the United States.

MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-lated gasoline.

Materials Added To FuelAll gasoline sold in the United States is required tocontain effective detergent additives. Use of additionaldetergents or other additives is not needed under normal

conditions and would result inyou should not have to add a

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTI

Follow these guidelines to performance:

• The use of leaded gas is pUsing leaded gasoline can iand damage the emission c

• An out-of-tune engine, omalfunctions, can cause toverheat. If you notice a some light smoke, your enmalfunctioning and may rContact your authorized de







detergents or other additives is not needed under normal

• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold asoctane enhancers is not recommended. Most of theseproducts contain high concentrations of methanol.Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems

resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is notthe responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.Follow the precautions below to prevent carbonmonoxide poisoning.

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbonmonoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.

Never run the engine in garage, and never sit in aengine running for an extenstopped in an open area w

more than a short period, adto force fresh, outside air in

• Guard against carbon monnance. Have the exhaust sythe vehicle is raised. Haverepaired promptly. Until rewindows fully open.

•

Keep the liftgate closed whprevent carbon monoxide haust gases from entering t

STAR






monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS (DIESEL ENGINES)

NOTE: Federal law requires that you must fuel thisvehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15

ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of LowSulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maxi-mum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.

Use good quality diesel fuel For most year-round service, ASTM specification D-975 Grperformance. If the vehicle i

(below 20° F or -7° C), or colder-than-normal conditionuse climatized No. 2 diesel fufuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fueprotection from fuel gelling ofilters.

This vehicle is fully-compatiup to 5% biodiesel, meeting A

WARN

Do not use alcohol or gasoagent. They can be unstableand hazardous or explosivefuel.

Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Label







Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Label

Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To preventfuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water fromthe fuel/water separator using the provided fuel/waterseparator drain. If you buy good quality fuel and follow

the cold weather advice above, fuel conditioners shouldnot be required in your vehicle. If available in your area,a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer improvedcold-starting and warm-up performance.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF

EQUIPPED

E-85 General Information

The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique,yellow fuel filler cap (gas cap) that states Ethanol (E-85)/ Unleaded Gasoline, and by the FLEXFUEL badge thatwill be located on the body of your vehicle. This sectiononly covers those subjects that are unique to thesevehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual

for information on features tFlexible Fuel and gasoline-on

E-85 Fue

STAR






CAUTION!

Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler cap (gas cap)can operate on E-85.

ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)E-85 is a mixture of approxim15% unleaded gasoline.

WARN

Ethanol vapors are extremecause serious personal injuring materials lit in or near ting the fuel filler tube captank. Do not use E-85 as a cuse it near an open flame.

Fuel RequirementsIf your vehicle is E-85 compunleaded gasoline with an ofuel, or any mixture of these t

E-85 Badge







For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-mended.

When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling

• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for atleast 5 mi (8 km)

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hardstarting and/or significant deterioration in drivabilityduring warm up.

NOTE: Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTMD5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you mayexperience hard starting and rough idle following startup even if the above recommendations are followed,especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F(0°C).

Selection Of Engine Oil Fo(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicl

Whether operating the vehicleunleaded gasoline, the engin

same. Refer to “Maintenance Pthis manual for the proper quoil.

StartingThe characteristics of E-85 fuelwhen ambient temperatures farange of 0° to 32°F (-18° to 0°Cincrease in the time it takes fo

a deterioration in drivabilityuntil the engine is fully warm

Cruising RangeBecause E-85 fuel contains lethan gasoline, you will expe

STAR






consumption. You can expect your MPG and your driv-ing range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasolineoperation.

Replacement PartsAll components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) aredesigned to be compatible with ethanol. Always be surethat your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-patible parts.

CAUTION!

• Replacing fuel system components with non-

ethanol compatible components can damage yourvehicle.

• Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% inyour vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold start-ing and may affect drivability.

ADDING FUEL

CAUTI

DO NOT put gasoline inequipped). If you accidentavehicle, DO NOT start thedamage to the fuel systemflushed.

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behinddriver’s side of the vehicle.

damaged, be sure the replacemvehicle.







CAUTI

• Damage to the fuel systsystem could result from

cap (gas cap). A poorly firities into the fuel systemaftermarket cap can causetor Light (MIL) to illumiescaping from the system

• A poorly fitting gas cap tion Indicator Light to tu

• To avoid fuel spillage and

off” the fuel tank after fi

NOTE: When the fuel nozzlfuel tank is full.

Fuel Filler Cap

STAR






WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or nearthe vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the

tank filled.• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is

in violation of most state and federal fire regula-tions and will cause the malfunction indicatorlight to turn on.

NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn untilyou hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is

properly tightened.If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MalfunctionIndicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap istightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

WARN

A fire may result if gasoportable container that is

could be burned. Always plground while filling.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessIf the vehicle diagnostic systefiller cap is loose, improperly“CHECK GASCAP” messagEVIC (Electronic Vehicle Info

“Electronic Vehicle Informatithis manual. Tighten the fuel sound is heard. This is an indcap is properly tightened. RefSystem — OBDII” in Section information.







CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-tem could result from using an improper fuel tank

filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could letimpurities into the fuel system.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification labelaffixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indhour of manufacture. The bar

bottom of the label is your VI

Gross Vehicle Weight RatinThe GVWR is the total permissincluding driver, passengerstongue weight, and cargo. Thmum capacities of front and rTotal load must be limited, so GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is deweight a truck can carry, incdriver, all passengers, options

Gross Axle Weight Rating (The GAWR is the maximum pand rear axles. The load must area so that the GAWR of eac

STAR






Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components inthe system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspensioncomponents, sometimes specified by purchasers for in-

creased durability, does not necessarily increase the ve-hicle’s GVWR.

Tire SizeThe tire size on the label represents the actual tire size onyour vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the loadcapacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire sizelisted.

Inflation PressureThis is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle forall loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb WeightThe curb weight of a vehicle isof the vehicle with all fluids, incapacity conditions, and wit

loaded into the vehicle. The fvalues are determined by wcommercial scale before anyadded.

LoadingThe actual total weight and threar of your vehicle at the grou

by weighing it when it is loade

The entire vehicle should firstcial scale to ensure that theceeded. The weight on the froshould then be determined seload is properly distributed Weighing the vehicle may sho







the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the totalload is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must beshifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriateuntil the specified weight limitations are met. Store the

heavier items down low and be sure that the weight isdistributed equally. Stow all loose items securely beforedriving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affecton the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the waythe brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWRor the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change theway your vehicle handles. This could cause you tolose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life ofyour vehicle.

TRAILER TOWINGIn this section you will find son limits to the type of towinwith your vehicle. Before t

review this information to toand safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coveragand recommendations in thhicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definition

The following trailer towing re

you in understanding the follGross Vehicle Weight RatinThe GVWR is the total allowaThis includes driver, passengeweight. The total load must beexceed the GVWR.

STAR






Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of allcargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its Љloaded and

ready for operationЉ condition. The recommended way tomeasure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on avehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must besupported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicleand trailer when weighed in combination. (Note thatGCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the

presence of a driver).

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rearaxles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axlesevenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front orrear GAWR.

WARN

It is important that you do nfront or rear GAWR. A dang

can result if either rating is control of the vehicle and h

Trailer Tongue Weight (TWThe TW is the downward forc

by the trailer. In most cases it sor more than 15% of the trailethis as part of the load on you

Frontal AreaThe frontal area is the maximwidth of the front of a trailer.

Weight-Carrying HitchA weight-carrying hitch suweight, just as if it were lugga







some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today andthey are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing HitchA weight-distributing hitch system works by applyingleverage through spring (load) bars. They are typicallyused for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weightto the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ direc-tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering moreconsistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing

towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic swaycontrol also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross-winds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle andtrailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended forheavier trailer tongue weights (TW) and may be required

depending on Vehicle and Trato comply with gross axlerequirements.

WARN• An improperly adjusted w

system may reduce handing performance, and cou

• Weight-distributing hitccompatible with Surge Bwith your hitch and trreputable Recreational V

tional information.

STAR






Trailer Hitch ClassificationYour vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with theoptional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized

dealer for package content.

The following chart provides the industry standard forthe maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class cantow and should be used to assist you in selecting thecorrect trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for yourgiven drivetrain.

Trailer Hitch Classifi

Class Ma

Class I - Light Duty

Class II - MediumDuty

Class III - Heavy Duty

Class IV - ExtraHeavy Duty

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Trailer Weight Ratings)” charGross Trailer Weight (GTW)

drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be pyour vehicle.







Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given

Engine/Model Model GCWR (Gross Com-bined Wt. Rating)

Frontal Area Max. GTW (Trailer W

3.7L 4x2 8,400 lbs (3 810 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1 5




4.7L (w/Trailer TowGroup IV)

4x2 11,400 lbs (5 170 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 6,500 lbs (2 9

4.7L (Laredo/Limited)(w/Trailer TowGroup IV)




STAR






3.0L Diesel(Limited)


3.0L Diesel(Overland)


3.0L Diesel 4x4 12,250 lbs (5 556 kg) 64 sq ft (5.95 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3 2Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered aspart of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, andshould never exceed the weight referenced on the Tireand Loading Information placard. The addition of pas-sengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue

load and Gross Trailer Weigcargo (to the trailer) may be neRear Gross Axle Weight Rat(1 451 kg).







Trailer And Trailer Tongue WeightAlways load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight inthe front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of theGross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your

vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels, or heavier in therear, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-sidewhich will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.

Consider the following itemweight on the front/rear axle

• The trailer tongue weight o

• The weight of any other typut in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver an

STAR






NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on thetrailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additionalfactory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installedoptions, must be considered as part of the total load on

your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Informationplacard in the “Tire Safety Information” section of thismanual for the maximum combined weight of occupantsand cargo for your vehicle.

Towing RequirementsTo promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-etrain components, the following guidelines are recom-mended.

CAUTION!

• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-age your vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (

• During the first 500 mtowing, limit your speed

Perform the maintenance liSchedule.” Refer to Section proper maintenance intervalnever exceed the GAWR, or G

WARN

• Make certain that the loa

and will not shift duringcargo that is not fully secucan occur that may be dcontrol. You could lose cohave an accident.








• Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.Follow these guidelines to make your trailer tow-

ing as safe as possible:

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause aloss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-sis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to thehook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chainsunder the trailer tongue and allow enough slack forturning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.When parking, apply the parking brake on the towvehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For

four-wheel drive vehicles, mis not in NEUTRAL. Alwtrailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceed

• Total weight must be distvehicle and the trailer sucratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Trailer tongue weight rutilized (This requirementalways achieve the 10% to 1as a percentage of total trai

STAR






Towing Requirements — Tires

− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compactspare tire.

− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safeand satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to“Tires – General Information” for proper tire inflationprocedures.

− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflationpressures before trailer usage.

− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – GeneralInformation” for proper inspection procedure.

− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-mation” for proper tire replacement procedures. Re-placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity willnot increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Tr

− Do not interconnect the hvacuum system of your vehThis could cause inadequpersonal injury.

− An electronically-actuated required when towing a actuated brakes. When towa hydraulic surge-actuated

brake controller is not requ

− Trailer brakes are recom

1,000 lbs (454 kg), and requ2,000 lbs (907 kg).







CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)loaded, it should have its own brakes and they

should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do thiscould lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higherbrake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’shydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brakesystem and cause it to fail. You might not havebrakes when you need them and could have anaccident.

(Continued)

WARNING! (

• Towing any trailer will distance. When towing, yditional space between yhicle in front of you. Failin an accident.

Towing Requirements — TWhenever you pull a trailer, rstop lights and turn signals onmotoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package mawiring harness. Use a factoryand connector.

STAR






The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.Refer to the following illustrations.

4-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

7-Pin Con

1 — Battery 52 — Backup Lamps 63 — Right Stop/Turn 74 — Electric Brakes







Towing TipsBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stoppingand backing the trailer in an area away from heavytraffic.

Automatic TransmissionThe DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, theTOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range,should be selected.

NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or alower gear range while operating the vehicle underheavy operating conditions, will improve performance

and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-ing and heat buildup. This action will also provide betterengine braking.

The transmission fluid and fyou REGULARLY tow a traileof continuous operation. ReSchedule” in Section 8 of this

nance intervals.NOTE: Check the transmissio(4.7L and 5.7L engines).

Electronic Speed Control —

− Do not use in hilly terrain

− When using the speed contrdrops greater than 10 mph

you can get back to cruisin

− Use speed control in flat termaximize fuel efficiency.

STAR






Cooling SystemTo reduce potential for engine and transmission over-heating, take the following actions:

− City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

− Highway Driving Reduce speed.

− Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily.

SNOW PLOW

Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipmentshould not be added to the front end of your vehicle. Theairbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in thefront end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.

WARN

Do not add a snow plow,aftermarket equipment to t

This could adversely affecairbag system and you coul

RECREATIONAL TOWING

MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing – 2WD Models

Recreational towing is allow

is removed. Towing with the while the driveshaft is conntransmission damage.







Towing — Quadra-Trac I (Single-Speed TransferCase) 4WD Models

Recreational towing is not allowed. This model does nothave a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case.

Towing — Quadra–Trac II /Quadra–Drive II 4WD

Models

CAUTION!

Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internaldamage to the transmission or transfer case will occurif a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational

towing.

NOTE: The transfer case must be in the NEUTRALposition, and the transmission must be in the PARKposition for recreational towing.

Shifting Into NEUTRALUse the following procedure trecreational towing.

CAUTIIt is necessary to follow thesthe transfer case is fully in ational towing to prevent d

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition key ON,

3. Shift the transmission into 4. Shift the transfer case into

STAR






Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.)for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch startsto blink, indicating shift in progress. The lamp will stop

blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is

complete. A “4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message willdisplay on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.

5. Start the engine.

6. Shift the transmission into

7. Release the brake pedal anvehicle movement.

8. Shut the engine off.

Neutral S







9. Shift the transmission into PARK.

10. Place the ignition key in the OFF position, andremove key.

11. Apply the parking brake.12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar.

13. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION!

Transmission damage may occur if the transmissionis shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEU-

TRAL and the engine running. With the transfer casein NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior toshifting the transmission into PARK (refer to steps 7and 8 above).

Shifting Out Of NEUTRALUse the following procedure tnormal usage.

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition key ON,


4. Shift the transfer case out o

STAR






Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.)for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch startsto blink, indicating shift in progress. The lamp will stop

blinking (go out) when shift is complete. The “4WD

SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will no longer bedisplayed on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.


6. Start the engine.


Neutral S







NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL,turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gearclash.

WARNING!You or others could be injured if you leave thevehicle unattended with the transfer case in theNEUTRAL position without first fully engaging theparking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL positiondisengages both the front and rear driveshafts fromthe powertrain and will allow the vehicle to moveeven if the transmission is in PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver isnot in the vehicle.

CAUTI

Do not use a bumper-mounyour vehicle. The bumper f

STAR











WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Ⅵ If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Ⅵ Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

▫ Jacking Instructions . . .

Ⅵ Jump-Starting . . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Emergency Tow Hooks —

Ⅵ Towing A Disabled Vehicle

▫ 2–Wheel Drive Models O

▫ 4–Wheel Drive Models O






HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSThe Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on theswitch bank just above the climate controls.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flashers. When the Hazard Warning flasher switchis activated, all directional turn signals will flash

on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and should not beused when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when yourvehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard forother motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, theHazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with theignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashermay run down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEIn any of the following situapotential for overheating by tion.

• On the highways — Slow d

• In city traffic — While stoppNEUTRAL, but do not incr

NOTE: There are steps that yan impending overheat conditis on, turn it off. The air conditthe engine cooling system a

removes this heat. You can control to maximum heat, thethe fan control to high. This aas a supplement to the radiatorfrom the engine cooling syste

390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES






CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damageyour vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT

(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehiclewith the air conditioner turned off until the pointerdrops back into the normal range. If the pointerremains on HOT (H), and you hear continuouschimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call forservice.

JACKING AND TIRE CHAN

WARN

• Getting under a jacked-u

The vehicle could slip offYou could be crushed. Nbody under a vehicle thatto get under a raised vehcenter where it can be ra

• The jack is designed tochanging tires only. The jalift the vehicle for servic

should be jacked on a fAvoid ice or slippery area

WHAT T






Jack LocationThe scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are locatedin the passenger side compartment, behind the secondrow seat.

Spare Tire StowageThe spare tire is stowed undemeans of a cable winch mechthe spare, use the jack handldrive” nut. The nut is located center-rear of the cargo floor aopening.

CAUTI

Do not use power tools to wImpact type tools can damag

Jack Storage Location







Spare Tire RemovalFit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use thelug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until thespare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable toallow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

CAUTI

• The winch mechanism is jack extension tube only

other power tools is notdamage the winch.

• When the spare is clear, tof the cable and pull it twheel.

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm

slippery surfaces.

Lowering/Raising Spare Tire

WHAT T






WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of thevehicle closest to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid being hit when operating the jackor changing the wheel.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Place the shift lever into PARK.

4. Turn the ignition OFF.

5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

6. Block both the front and rear of thewheel diagonally opposite of the jack-ing position. For example, if changingthe right front tire, block the left rearwheel.

NOTE: Passengers should when the vehicle is being jack

Jacking Instructions

WARNCarefully follow these tirehelp prevent personal injuvehicle:

• Always park on a firm, lthe edge of the roadway athe vehicle.

• Block the wheel diagona

be raised.• Set the parking brake firm

transmission in PARK; aREVERSE.








• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on ajack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated andfor lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremelycareful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated aresecurely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack

2. Loosen (but do not removturning them to the left, one tuon the ground.

Jack Warnin

WHAT T






3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown. Connect jack handle driver (1) to two extensions (2), then to thelug wrench (3).

4. Locate the jack as shown. under the front lower control axle, place it under the axle neEnsure the jack is closest to th

jacking on the rear axle. Do nyou are sure the jack is fully

Assembling Jack Tools

1 — Jack Handle Driver2 — Extensions3 — Wrench Front Jacking








5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surfaceand enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARN

Raising the vehicle higher tthe vehicle less stable. It cohurt someone near it. Raiseto remove the tire.

6. Remove the lug nuts and w

7. Position the spare wheel/tithe lug nuts with the cone-shaLightly tighten the nuts. To avvehicle off the jack, do not tighvehicle has been lowered.

8. Lower the vehicle by turniclockwise, and remove the jac

9. Finish tightening the lug wrench while tightening for innuts until each nut has been

Rear Jacking Location

WHAT T







wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubtabout the correct tightness, have them checked with atorque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a servicestation.

10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision orhard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire inthe places provided.

11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper loca-tions.

NOTE: A tire should be stowed with the “beauty” sideup. Storing the tire upside down may result in scratchingor damage to the wheel face. Continue winching up thetire until you hear the winch “ratchet” three times.

Double check to ensure theunderbody of the vehicle. Dmay result if the vehicle is dr

WARN

Do not use power tools to wImpact-type tools may damnism.

12. Reinstall the plastic plug area.

JUMP-STARTING

If the vehicle has a discharged be used to obtain a start from battery in another vehicle. Tdangerous if done improperlycarefully.








WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do notallow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-ing. Do not lean over a battery when attachingclamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. Ifacid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contami-nated area immediately with large quantities ofwater.

• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark awayfrom the vent holes.

• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster

source that has a greater than 12-Volt system, i.e.Do not use a 24-Volt power source.

1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets, which might make an unintended electricalcontact.

2. Park the booster vehicle wout letting the vehicles touch

both vehicles, place the transmthe ignition OFF.

3. Turn off the heater, radio, acal loads.

4. Connect one end of a jumterminal of the booster batterythe same cable to the positive

battery.

WARN

Do not permit vehicles to could establish a ground cinjury could result.

WHAT T







5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminalof the booster battery and then to the engine of thevehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you havea good contact on the engine.

6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start theengine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the abovesequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

WARNING!

Any procedure other than above could result in:

• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting outthe battery vent.

• Personal injury or property damage due to batteryexplosion.

(Continued)

WARNING! (

• Damage to charging systof immobilized vehicle.

• You should not try to start

or towing.• Do not connect the cable t

discharge battery. The rcould cause the battery to

• During cold weather whlow freezing point, elecbattery may freeze. Do nbecause the battery could

battery temperature musfreezing point before atte

EMERGENCY TOW HOOK

If your vehicle is equipped wione in the rear and two mo








vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s sideof the vehicle.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of

damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue avehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks fortow truck hookup or highway towing. You coulddamage your vehicle.

WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.Tow straps and chains may break, causing seriousinjury.

TOWING A DISABLED VEH

2–Wheel Drive Models Onl

Provided the transmission is oTRAL at speeds not exceedin

distances of not more than 15more than 30 mph (48 km/h)(24 km), can cause severe tratransmission is not operabletowed faster than 30 mph (15 miles (24 km), remove thefour wheels OFF the ground. tow the vehicle on a flatbedvehicle raised and the other e

4–Wheel Drive Models Onl

The manufacturer recommenwheels OFF the ground. Accethe vehicle on a flatbed or wraised and the other end on a

WHAT T








Of id l l







MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Engine Compartment – 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406



Ⅵ Engine Compartment – 3.0L Diesel . . . . . . . . . 409

Ⅵ Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 410

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Ⅵ Emissions Inspection And MaintenancePrograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Ⅵ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Ⅵ Dealer Service . . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Maintenance Procedures .

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . .

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery

▫ Air Conditioner Mainten

▫ Body Lubrication . . . .

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades

▫ Adding Washer Fluid .


Of id l l







▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

▫ Maintenance After Off-Road Driving . . . . . . 436

▫ Appearance Care And Protection FromCorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Ⅵ Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

▫ Underhood Fuses (Power DistributionCenter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

▫ Underhood Fuses(Integrated Power Modu

Ⅵ Vehicle Storage . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Replacement Bulbs . . . .

Ⅵ Bulb Replacement . . . . .

▫ High Intensity Discharge— If Equipped . . . . . .

▫ Headlight . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Front Turn Signal . . . .

▫ Front Fog Light . . . . .

▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn SignLights . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Center High-Mounted St

404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE


Of id l t l







Ⅵ Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Ⅵ Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 458

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . .

MAINT


Of id l t l







ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.7L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Battery2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir3 — Power Distribution Center 8 — Engine Oil Fill4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap5 — Integrated Power Module 10 — Air Cleaner Filter



Ofrecido por electroman ales com








1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Battery2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Oil Fill4 — Power Distribution Center 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Air Cleaner Filter6 — Integrated Power Module

MAINT










1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick3 — Power Distribution Center 9 — Engine Oil Fill4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap5 — Integrated Power Module 11 — Air Cleaner Filter6 — Battery










ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.0L DIESEL

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir2 — Power Distribution Center 7 — Engine Oil Fill3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick4 — Integrated Power Module 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter5 — Battery

MAINT









ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboarddiagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitorsthe performance of the emissions, engine, and automatictransmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II systemwill turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It willalso store diagnostic codes and other information toassist your service technician in making repairs. Al-though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service assoon as possible.

CAUTI

• Prolonged driving with ttor Light” on could causemission control system

economy and drivabilityserviced before any emiformed.

• If the “Malfunction Indwhile the engine is runnverter damage and powImmediate service is requ

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessAfter fuel is added, the vehidetermine if the fuel filler installed, or damaged. A “CHwill be displayed in the EVIC










manual). Tighten the gas cap until a ЉclickingЉ sound isheard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properlytightened.

The message will remain displayed until the vehicle

diagnostic system can retest the fuel system. The test willperform the next time the vehicle is started, if the vehiclewas keyed off above 40°F (4°C) outside temperature andthe following vehicle start is above 40°F (4°C) outsidetemperature. It may be possible to have a message thatwill not clear due to the test being disabled due to lowoutside temperatures. If the test is performed and theproblem is gone, the message will disappear.

If the problem persists, the message will appear the nexttime the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damagedcap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the systemwill turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. Seeyour authorized dealer for service.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION APROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be aan inspection of your vehicle’sFailure to pass could prevent

For states that requirenance (I/M), this checIndicator Light (MIL) i

when the engine is running, ais ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II systemsystem may not be ready if

serviced, recently had a dead bment. If the OBD II system sready for the I/M test, your v

MAINT









Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,which you can use prior to going to the test station. Tocheck if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you mustdo the following:

1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crankor start the engine.

3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to startthis test over.

4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, youwill see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb

check.5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things willhappen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and thenreturn to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engvehicle’s OBD II system isnot proceed to the I/M stat

b. The MIL will not flash a

illuminated until you turn Oengine. This means that youis ready and you can proce

If your OBD II system is not rauthorized dealer or repair farecently serviced or had a battyou may need to do nothinvehicle as you normally woul

system to update. A recheck wmay then indicate that the sys

Regardless of whether your vready or not, if the MIL is ilvehicle operation you should










before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can failyour vehicle because the MIL is on with the enginerunning.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduledmaintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-sure the designed performance. Damage or failurescaused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenanceand repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’swarranty.

DEALER SERVICEYour authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all serviceoperations in an expert manner. Service Manuals areavailable which include detailed service information foryour vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attemptingany procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tamperinsystems can result in civil against you.

WARN

You can be badly injured wmotor vehicle. Only do servhave the knowledge and thyou have any doubt about yservice job, take your vehchanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDU

The pages that follow containservices determined by the envehicle.

Besides the maintenance itemmaintenance intervals, there a

MAINT









operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, itcould adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.These items should be inspected if a malfunction isobserved or suspected.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil LevelTo assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level atregular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time tocheck the engine oil level is about five minutes after afully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the

engine after it has sat overnight.Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground willimprove the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintainthe oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart

(0.95L) of oil when the level isrange will result in the level brange.

CAUTI

Overfilling or underfilling aeration or loss of oil pressyour engine.

3.0L Diesel Engine OnlyBefore checking the engine oiand wait 15 minutes to allow fpan.

Change Engine OilRefer to the “Maintenance Sproper maintenance intervals










3.0L Diesel Engine OnlyAnytime the oil is drained and filled it is very importantto wait 15 minutes before starting the engine.

Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline EnginesFor best performance and maximum protection for allengines under all types of operating conditions, themanufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler MaterialStandard MS-6395.

American Petroleum InstituIdentification Symbol

This sy been cPetrole

manufaAPI Ce

Engine Oil Selection - DiesFor best performance and mengines under all types of

manufacturer recommends erequirements of Chrysler MateMercedes Benz MB 229.31 orqualified engine oils

MAINT









Engine Oil Viscosity (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines)SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operatingtemperatures. This engine oil improves low temperaturestarting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommendedengine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information onengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-ment” in this section.

Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certi-fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber, should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity (3.0L D

CAUTI

Your vehicle is equipped w

ogy Diesel Engine and an eto limit Diesel Particulatereleased into the atmospherengine and life expectancy filter emission device is highof the correct engine oil.

SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Low Amended for all operating tem

improves low temperature economy.










The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommendedengine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information onengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-ment” in this section.

Synthetic Engine OilsYou may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oilquality requirements are met, and the recommendedmaintenance intervals for oil and filter changes arefollowed.

Materials Added to Engine OilsThe manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and itsperformance may be impaired by supplementaladditives.

Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil FiltersCare should be taken in disposing of used engine oil andoil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, caenvironment. Contact your lovice station, or governmentaland where used oil and oil filtin your area.

Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should beat every oil change.

Engine Oil Filter SelectionThe manufacturer’s engines haable oil filter. Use a filter of thiquality of replacement filters

high-quality filters should becient service. MOPAR engineoil filters and are recommend

Engine Air Cleaner FilterRefer to the “Maintenance Schproper maintenance interval.

MAINT









WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) canprovide a measure of protection in the case of enginebackfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessaryfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one isnear the engine compartment before starting thevehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result inserious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filtersvaries considerably. Only high quality filters should beused to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine aircleaner filters are a high quality filter and arerecommended.

Maintenance-Free BatteryYour vehicle is equipped with You will never have to add wtenance required.

WARN• Battery fluid is a corrosiv

burn or even blind you. Dto contact your eyes, skinover a battery when atsplashes in eyes or on skdiately with large amoun

• Battery gas is flammab

flame or sparks away froma booster battery or any oan output greater than 12 clamps to touch each oth











• Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash handsafter handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on thebattery that the positive cable is attached to thepositive post, and the negative cable is attached tothe negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)positive and (-) negative and identified on thebattery case.

• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in thevehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cablesbefore connecting the charger to the battery. Donot use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner MaintenanFor best possible performanshould be checked and serviceat the start of each warm seinclude cleaning of the conden

test. Drive belt condition shoutime.

WARN

• Use only refrigerants anapproved by the manufactioning system. Some unaflammable and can explo

unapproved refrigerants the system to fail, requirinSection 3 of the Warrantadditional warranty infor

MAINT

p









• The air conditioning system contains refrigerantunder high pressure. To avoid risk of personalinjury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnectedshould be done by an experienced repairman.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C SystemSealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-sor Oil, and Refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery and RecyclingR-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the EnvironmentalProtection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.However, the manufacturer recommends that air condi-tioning service be performed by authorized dealers orother service facilities using recovery and recyclingequipment.

Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot poinseat tracks, door hinge pivot ptailgate, sliding doors and hoocated periodically with a lith

MOPAR Spray White Lube ttion and to protect against ruapplication of any lubricant, t

be wiped clean to remove dusexcess oil and grease shoulattention should also be givennents to insure proper functiounderhood services, the hoodand safety catch should be cle

The external lock cylinders shyear, preferably in the Fall aamount of a high quality luLock Cylinder Lubricant direc


p








Windshield Wiper BladesClean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and thewindshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and amild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of saltor road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periodsmay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always usewasher fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirtfrom a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from thewindshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact withpetroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

Adding Washer FluidOn vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will beindicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, thewindshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline andthe “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.

The fluid reservoir for the wirear window washer is sharlocated in the engine compartfluid level at regular intervawindshield washer solvent on

When refilling the washer fwasher fluid and apply it to clean the wiper blades, this wTo prevent freeze-up of your in cold weather, select a solutiexceeds the temperature ranrating information can be foucontainers.

MAINT

p







WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solventsare flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Caremust be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Exhaust SystemThe best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seamsor loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartmeexhaust system each time thecation or oil change. Replace a

WARN

Exhaust gases can injure or kmonoxide (CO), which is Breathing it can make yoeventually poison you. To ato Exhaust Gas in the Safmanual.

The catalytic converter requir

only. Leaded gasoline will desconverter as an emission cont


p







Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assureproper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalystdamage.

CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if yourvehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. Inthe event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-ued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,resulting in possible damage to the converter andvehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tamperinsystems can result in civil against you.

WARN

A hot exhaust system can stamaterials that can burn. Sgrass or leaves coming into csystem. Do not park or operwhere your exhaust system can burn.

In unusual situations involvi

engine operation, a scorchingand abnormal catalyst overhthe vehicle, turn off the engService, including a tuneup totions, should be obtained imm

MAINT

p







To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is inmotion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing thevehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wiresdisconnected or removed, such as when diagnostictesting, or for prolonged periods during very roughidle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARN

You or others can be badlycoolant (antifreeze) or steamyou see or hear steam comindo not open the hood until tto cool. Never try to open a cap when the radiator or co

Engine Coolant ChecksCheck the engine coolant (an12 months (before the onset o

applicable). If the engine coolrusty in appearance, the syflushed and refilled with frfreeze). Check the front of th


p







accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gentlyspraying water from a garden hose vertically down theface of the condenser.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at

the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect theentire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (butnot running), check the cooling system pressure cap forproper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery

bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURECAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, FIf the engine coolant (antifreeconsiderable amount of sedimreliable cooling system cleanerinsing to remove all deposit

dispose of the old engine coolRefer to the “Maintenance Schproper maintenance interval.

Selection Of CoolantUse only the manufacturer’s rant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluiine Parts” in this section for t

MAINT

p






CAUTION!

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than thespecified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), mayresult in engine damage and may decrease corrosion

protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (anti-freeze) is introduced into the cooling system in anemergency, it should be replaced with the specifiedengine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.

Do not use water alone or alcohol based enginecoolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additionalrust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may notbe compatible with the engine coolant (antifreeze)and may plug the radiator.

This vehicle has not been designed for use withPropylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-freeze) is not recommended.

Adding CoolantYour vehicle has been built coolant (antifreeze) that allointervals. This engine coolant to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (1

ment. To prevent reducing tperiod, it is important that coolant (antifreeze) throughoPlease review these recommeOrganic Additive Technology(antifreeze).

When adding engine coolant

• The manufacturer recomAntifreeze/ Coolant 5–YeHOAT (Hybrid Organic Ad







• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F(-37°C) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality waterwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in theengine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-cording to the temperatures occurring in the area wherethe vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine cooldecrease the life of the enginwill require more frequent echanges.

Cooling System Pressure C

The cap must be fully tightenecoolant (antifreeze), and to e(antifreeze) will return to therecovery tank.

The cap should be inspected accumulation of foreign mater

MAINT

G O C






WARNING!

• The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on thecooling system pressure cap are a safety precau-tion. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when

the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or removethe cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causespressure to build up in the cooling system. Toprevent scalding or injury, do not remove thepressure cap while the system is hot or underpressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the onespecified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-gine damage may result.

Disposal of Used Engine CoolantUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) isa regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Checkwith your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. Tomals and children, do not stengine coolant (antifreeze) in to remain in puddles on thechild, contact a physician im

ground spills immediately.Coolant LevelThe coolant bottle provides adetermining that the engine cadequate. With the engine idoperating temperature, the l(antifreeze) in the bottle shouindicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remainsno need to remove the radiatoengine coolant (antifreeze) fregine coolant (antifreeze). Adv


MAINT






of this. As long as the engine operating temperature issatisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked oncea month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed tomaintain the proper level, it should be added to the

coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor comingfrom the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows noevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may besafely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant

• Check engine coolant (antiradiator and in the coolantcoolant (antifreeze) needs coolant recovery bottle mu

freezing.

• If frequent engine coolantrequired, or if the level in tdoes not drop when the system should be pressure

• Maintain engine coolant (a50% HOAT engine coolan

and distilled water for propyour engine, which contain

• Make sure that the radia bottle hoses are not kinked

MAINT







• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle isequipped with air conditioning, keep the front of thecondenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winteroperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs mayresult in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gasmileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brakesystem components should be periodically inspected.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for theproper maintenance interval.

WARN

Riding the brakes can leapossibly an accident. Drivinor riding on the brake pedal

high brake temperatures, expossible brake damage. Youbraking capacity in an emer

Fluid Level Check — BrakeThe fluid level of the master cwhen performing under the ately if the brake system warnfailure.

The brake master cylinder reservoir. On the outboard sid“MAX” dot and a “MIN” dokept within these two dots. DMAX mark, because leakage m


MAINT






With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall asthe brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop influid level may be caused by a leak and a system checkshould be conducted.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this

section for the correct fluid type.

WARNING!

• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initialboiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,may result in sudden brake failure during hardprolonged braking. You could have an accident.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result inspilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and thebrake fluid catching fire.

Use only brake fluid that hacontainer to avoid contaminatmoisture.

CAUTI

Do not allow a petroleum-bthe brake fluid. Seal damag

Front/Rear Axle Fluid

Front Axle Fluid Level CheLubricant should be to the bo

Rear Axle Fluid Level Chec

Lubricant should be 1/2 inchole.

Adding FluidAdd lubricant only at the fill specified above.

MAINT







Selection of LubricantUse only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Referto “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sectionfor correct fluid type.

Transfer Case

Fluid Level CheckInspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak isfound, the transfer case fluid level can be checked byremoving the filler plug located on the back side of thetransfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edgeof the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a levelposition.

Adding FluidAdd fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,when the vehicle is in a level position.

DrainFirst remove fill plug, then remended tightening torque for 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).

CAUTIWhen installing plugs, do ndamage them and cause the

Selection of LubricantUse only the manufacturer’s to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Gefor correct fluid type.


MAINTOfrecido por www.electromanuales.com





Automatic Transmission

Selection of LubricantIt is important that the proper lubricant is used in thetransmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-

mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in this section for correct fluid type. It is importantthat the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre-scribed level using the recommended fluid.

CAUTI

Using a transmission fluid turer’s recommended fluid in transmission shift quality

shudder. Using a transmissmanufacturer’s recommendmore frequent fluid and “Fluids, Lubricants, and Getion for correct fluid type.

Special AdditivesAutomatic Transmission Fluiproduct and its performance m

mental additives. Therefore, dtives to the transmission. Tpolicy is the use of special dyleaks. In addition, avoid usinthey may adversely affect sea

MAINT

434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEOfrecido por www.electromanuales.com





Fluid Level Check (3.7L and 3.0L Diesel Engine)Regular fluid level checks are not required. For thisreason, the dipstick is omitted.

If you notice fluid loss or shift lever malfunction, haveyour authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.

CAUTION!

• Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-ration in transmission shift quality and/or torqueconverter shudder. Using a transmission fluidother than that recommended by the manufacturerwill result in more frequent fluid and filter

changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (

• The fluid level is preset anot require adjustment conditions. If a transmivisit your authorized deadamage to the transmissthorized dealer has the pfluid level accurately.

Fluid Level Check (4.7L andCheck the fluid level while thoperating temperature. This o(25 km) of driving. At normal

fluid cannot be held comfortaTo check the fluid level propermust be used:

1. Operate the engine at idle stemperature.







2. The vehicle must be on level ground.

3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brakepedal.

4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position

ending with the lever in PARK.5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it untilseated.

6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-ing temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is asolid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. If the

fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Donot overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through theoil fill tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil tofully drain into the transmission before rechecking thefluid level.

NOTE: If it is necessary to chthe operating temperature, t

between the two “COLD” (lowith the fluid at approximateperature). If the fluid level

room temperature, it should(upper) reference holes when180°F (82°C). Remember it is bnormal operating temperature

CAUTI

Be aware that if the fluid te(10°C) it may not register on

fluid until the temperaturproduce an accurate reading

7. Check for leaks. Release pa

MAINT






To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmissionafter checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that thedipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for thedipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seatedposition, as long as its seal remains engaged in the

dipstick tube.Maintenance After Off-Road Driving

After extended operation in mud, sand or water, orsimilar dirty conditions, have your brake discs, brakelinings, and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon aspossible. This will prevent any abrasive material fromcausing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.

After driving off-road, completely inspect the underbody

of your vehicle. Check the tires, body structure, steering,suspension and exhaust system for damage. Checkthreaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on thechassis, drivetrain components, steering and suspension.Retighten, if required, to torque values specified in the

Service Manual. Also check fotion or brush that could becomdamage to fuel lines, brake hopropeller shafts.

CAUTIUnder frequent heavy-duchange all lubricants, andnents, all driveline joints anoften than in normal serviwear.

Appearance Care And Prot

Protection of Body and PainVehicle body care requiremengraphic locations and usage. C






passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed ontrees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highlycorrosive to the metal in your vehicle.

The following maintenance recommendations will enableyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

•

Stone and gravel impact.• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularhicle in the shade using MOcar wash soap, and rinse thclear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similated on your vehicle, use Mand Tar Remover to remov

• Use MOPAR Cleaner Wstains, and to protect your pto scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive comp

that may diminish the glfinish.






CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materialssuch as steel wool or scouring powder, which willscratch metal and painted surfaces.

•

Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal ofpaint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drivenear the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least oncea month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edgesof the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be keptclear and open.

• If you detect any stone chiptouch them up immediatelyconsidered the responsibili

• If your vehicle is damagesimilar cause which destro

coating, have your vehiclesible. The cost of such repaisibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo sude-icer salt, etc., assure thpackaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done

mud or stone shields behin• Use MOPAR Touch Up Pa

soon as possible. Your authpaint to match the color of






Wheel and Wheel Trim CareAll wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum andchrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with amild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To removeheavy soil, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select anonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouringpads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. OnlyMOPAR cleaners are recommended. Do not use ovencleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidicsolutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’protective finish.

Interior CareUse MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and

carpeting.Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a dampcloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean, then

MOPAR Spot & Stain RemovDo not use harsh cleaners orTotal Clean to clean vinyl uph

Leather Seat Care And CleaMOPAR Total Clean is spec

leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can becleaning with a damp soft clocan act as an abrasive and damand should be removed promStubborn soils can be removand MOPAR Total Clean. Casoaking your leather upholste

do not use polishes, oils, cleangents, or ammonia-based cleaupholstery. Application of a required to maintain the origi






WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.Many are potentially flammable, and if used inclosed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.

Cleaning HeadlightsYour vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter andless susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and thereforedifferent lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses andreducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steelwool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass SurfacesAll glass surfaces should be with MOPAR Glass Cleahousehold-type glass cleaner. cleaner. Use caution when cleequipped with electric defrostother sharp instruments which

When cleaning the rearview mtowel or rag that you are usdirectly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic InstrumenThe lenses in front of the instmolded in clear plastic. When

must be taken to avoid scratch

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. Aused, but do not use high alcleaners. If soap is used, wiprag.






2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt MaintenanceDo not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemicalsolvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, amild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not removethe belts from the vehicle to wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

Dry with a soft tissue.

FUSESInterior Fuses

The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just tothe left of the steering column.

Cav-

ity

Cartridge

Fuse Mini-Fus1 30 Amp

Green

2 15 AmpBlue

Fuse Pa






Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fuse Description

3 10 AmpRed

Htd Mirror (EBL)

4 20 Amp

Yellow

Rr Pwr Out (B+)

5 10 AmpRed

Rr HVAC (R/O)(Commander Only)

6 Spare (B+)

7 20 AmpYellow

Door Locks (B+)

8 Spare (B+)

9 20 Amp

Yellow

Pwr Outlet (B+)

Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fus

10 10 AmpRed

11 Spare (B+

12 10 Amp

Red

13 10 AmpRed






Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse


14 20 AmpYellow

Cigar Ltr (R/A)

15 10 Amp

Red

Tire Pressure Tran-

sponders (R/O)16 10 Amp

RedUpper & LowerSwitch Bank, Diag.Connector, Cluster(B+)

17 15 AmpBlue

Flipper Glass (B+)

19 Spare(R/S)

20 10 AmpRed

Steering Column Con-trol Module (SCCM),Cluster (R/S), BUXTrailer Tow

Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fus

21 Spare(Acc De-lay)

22 15 AmpBlue

24 10 AmpRed

25 10 AmpRed






Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)

Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse


1 50 AmpRed

PTC Heater 1 (DieselOnly)

Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fus

2 40 AmpGreen

3 50 Amp

Red4 30 Amp

Pink

5 50 AmpRed

6 30 AmpPink

7 40 AmpGreen

8 40 AmpGreen

9 20 AmpBlue

Power Distribution Center






Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse


10 — Spare

11 40 AmpGreen

HVAC Blower

12 30 AmpPink

Rear Wiper, Ign R/O

13 40 AmpGreen

Rear Window De-froster (EBL)/HeatedMirror

14 30 AmpPink

Rear HVAC (If Equipped)

15 — Spare

16 50 AmpRed ASD

17 30 AmpPink

ABS Pump

Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fus

18 40 AmpGreen

19 40 Amp

Green20 30 Amp

Pink

21 20 AmpYellow

22 20 AmpYellow

23 25 AmpNatural

24 20 AmpYellow

25 20 AmpYellow






Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse


26 15 AmpBlue

Brake Lamps

27 20 Amp

Yellow

HD Washer (If

Equipped) (ExportOnly)

28 30 AmpGreen

ABS Valves

29 20 AmpYellow

PCM Batt (GasolineOnly)

30 — Spare

31 — Spare

32 15 AmpBlue Powertrain ControlModule (Diesel Only)

33 20 AmpYellow

Final Drive ControlModule (FDCM)E-Diff

Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fus

34 —

35 20 AmpYellow

36 — 37 20 Amp

Yellow

38 20 AmpYellow

39 20 AmpYellow

40 25 Amp

Natural

41 20 AmpYellow

42 —






Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse


43 25 AmpNatural

Coils, Actuators

44 — Spare

Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)

Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fus

8 10 AmpRed

9 10 Amp

Red10 10 AmpRed

12 20 AmpYellow

13 20 AmpYellow

14 20 AmpYellow

15 20 AmpYellow

16 20 AmpYellow

Integrated Power Module






Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse


17 20 AmpYellow

Rear Fog Lamps (Ex-port Only)

18 20 Amp

Yellow

Front Control Module

(FCM) Batt #119 20 AmpYellow

Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/Turn

20 20 AmpYellow

Front Control Module(FCM) Batt #3

21 20 AmpYellow

Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/Turn

22 30 AmpPink

Final Drive ControlModule (FDCM)

MOD23 50 Amp

RedRadiator Fan

27 15 AmpBlue

Ignition Off Draw(IOD) #1

Cav-ity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fus

28 20 AmpYellow

29 10 Amp

Red30 10 AmpRed

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehic21 days you may want to ta

battery. You may:

• Remove fuse #27 in the labeled Ignition-Off Draw

• Or, disconnect the negative

• Anytime you store your vservice (i.e. vacation) for tw






air conditioning system at idle for about five minutesin the fresh air and high blower setting. This willensure adequate system lubrication to minimize thepossibility of compressor damage when the system isstarted again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Lights Bulb TypeGlove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Grab Handle Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W

Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . VT4976

Rear Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2

Visor Vanity Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377

Underpanel Courtesy Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103

Telltale/Hazard Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Exterior Lights Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . .

Front Park/Turn Light . . . . .

Front Side Marker . . . . . . .

Headlights (Low Beam) . . . .

Headlights (High Beam) . . . .

Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lights .

NOTE: Numbers refer to cocan be purchased from your a

If a bulb needs to be replacdealer or refer to the applicab






BULB REPLACEMENT

High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If

Equipped

The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the

headlight switch off and the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulbyourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle toan authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets ofHigh Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the

headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause seriouselectrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-erly. See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: On vehicles equippecharge Headlights (HID), wheon, there is a blue hue to the l

becomes more white after appthe system charges.






Headlight

1. Open the hood.

2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turncounterclockwise to remove from housing.

3. Disconnect the electrical c bulb.

1 — High Beam Bulb 32 — Low Beam Bulb






CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oilcontamination will severely shorten bulb life. If thebulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean thebulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Turn Signal

1. Open the hood.

2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-clockwise to remove from housing.

3. Disconnect the electrical c bulb.

1 — High Beam Bulb 32 — Low Beam Bulb






CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oilcontamination will severely shorten bulb life. If thebulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean thebulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Fog Light

1. Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle.

2. Turn the front fog light bulb one–quarter turn coun-terclockwise to remove from housing.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.

CAUTI

Do not touch the new bulbcontamination will severelybulb comes in contact with abulb with rubbing alcohol.

R T il St T Si l A d B k Li ht






Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lights

1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.

3. Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from thehousing.

4. Pull the bulb to remove it f

5. Replace the bulb, reinstall tlight assembly.

1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb 32 — Tail/Turn Signal Bulb

Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) 2 T i t th b lb k t t






Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)

1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.

2. Twist the bulb socket to rhousing.

3. Pull the bulb out of the soc

4. Replace the bulb, reinstall tCHMSL.

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES






FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S.

Fuel (Approximate)

3.7/4.7/5.7L Gasoline Engines 21 Gallons

3.0L Diesel Engine 22 Gallons

Engine Oil with Filter3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts

4.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts

5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts

3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-30 Synthetic, API CertifiedLow Ash)

10 Quarts

Cooling System *

3.7 Liter and 4.7L Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze

5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat

12.7 Quarts

3.7 Liter and 4.7L Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat

14 Quarts

5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat

15.2 Quarts

5 7 Li E i (MOPAR E i C l /A if 5 16 7 Q






5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat

16.7 Quarts

3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat

13.9 Quarts

3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat

15.3 Quarts

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS






FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 MileOrganic Additive Technology)

Engine Oil (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines) Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meetingChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to youcorrect SAE grade.

Engine Oil (3.0L Diesel Engine) Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Low Ash requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-11229.31 or 229.51, and ACEA C3 qualified engine o

Oil Filter (3.7L Engine) MOPAR Engine Oil Filter (P/N 05184231AA) or

Oil Filter (4.7L and 5.7L Engine) MOPAR Engine Oil Filter (P/N 04884899AB) or e

Oil Filter (3.0L Diesel Engine) MOPAR Engine Oil Filter (P/N 05175571AA) or Spark Plugs (3.7L Engine) ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])

Spark Plugs (4.7L Engine) Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.040 in [1.02 mm]) L(Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])

Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine) LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])

C t Fl id L b i t G i P t







Fuel Selection (3.7L and 4.7L Engine) 87 Octane

Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine) 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended

Fuel Selection (3.0L Diesel Engine) Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supmanufacturer requires that you must fuel this veh

fur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximumof Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfdamage to the emissions control system. For most2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grgood performance. If the vehicle is exposed to ext-7C), or is required to operate at colder-than-normlonged periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel ofuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. Thible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meetD-975.

Chassis






Chassis


Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid

Transfer Case (NV140 Single SpeedOnly)

MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid

Transfer Case (NV245 Two SpeedOnly) MOPAR NV 247/245 Transfer Case Lubricant

Axle Differential (Front-Rear) MOPAR Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75equivalent with friction modifier additive.

Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should b J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is aommended brake fluids.

Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydrauing Fluid (P/N 05142893AA) or equivalent, which

Standard MS-10838.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES






MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 462

Ⅵ Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

▫ Maintenance Schedule —

▫ Maintenance Schedule —

EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDUL

462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESM

A

I

N






The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold typemust be done at the times or mileages specified to ensurethe continued proper functioning of the emissions controlsystem. These and all other maintenance services in-cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best

vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operatingconditions, such as dusty areas and very short tripdriving.

Inspection and service should also be done anytime amalfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-

sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may beperformed by any automotive repair establishment orindividual using any automotive part that has beencertified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

Maintenance Schedule — G

The oil change indicator systemtime to take your vehicle in fo

On Electronic Vehicle Inf

equipped vehicles “Oil Chanplayed in the EVIC and a indicating that an oil change i

Based on engine operation indicator message will illuminis required for your vehicle. Has soon as possible, within th

NOTE:• The oil change indicator me

time since the last oil chang8

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even the vehicle is on level grou

MAINOfrecido por www.electromanuales.com





y gif the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-nated.

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive yourvehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

• Under no circumstances should oil change intervalsexceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichevercomes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicatormessage after completing the scheduled oil change. If thisscheduled oil change is performed by someone otherthan your authorized dealer the message can be reset byreferring to the steps described under ”Electronic Vehicle

Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual.

At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fullywarmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while

gracy of the oil level readinlevel is at or below the AD

• Check the windshield warequired.

Once a Month

• Check tire pressure and ldamage.

• Inspect the battery and cleaas required.

• Check the fluid levels of thmaster cylinder, power s

(4.7L and 5.7L only) and ad

• Check all lights and other operation.

At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Inte


A

I

N






g

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance itemsmay result in damage to the vehicle.

q

NOTE: ** Vehicles built wequipped with sixteen spark pthe top of the engine under thelocated on the side of the eng

The spark plugs located undplug and must be change ever

The spark plugs located on thpremium plug and must be ch(170 000 km).

8

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

6 000 Miles (10 000 km) or 12 000 Miles (20 000 km) or 12 Months Maint






6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or

6 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maint

Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-r

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000

12 months.

❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,00

12 months.

Odometer Reading

Repair Order # Dea


18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30,000 M


A

I

N






18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or

18 Months MaintenanceService Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,change if using your vehicle for police,

taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer

towing.




24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or


filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of thefollowing: Dusty or off-road conditions.

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;

replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if

necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends

and boot seals; replace if necessary.




30,000 M

30 MontService ❏ Change t

filter.

❏ Rotate tir

❏Replace

❏ Replace

(4.7L En

❏ Replace

5.7L Eng

❏ Adjust pa

equipped

❏ Inspect th

Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

8

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or 48,000 M






36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or


filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of thefollowing: Dusty or off-road conditions.




necessary.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,

change if using your vehicle for police,


towing.




42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or


filter.

❏ Rotate tires.




48,000 M


filter.

❏ Rotate tir

❏If using yfollowing

Inspect th

replace if

❏ Inspect th

necessary

❏ Inspect th

❏ Inspect e

❏ Inspect th

and boot

Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or 60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Mai


A

I

N






, ( , )


filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,change if using your vehicle for police,


towing.




, ( , )


❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).

❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).

❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel d

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using

following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any o

fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 102,000 m

Odometer Reading

Repair Order # Dea


8

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or 72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Mai






, ( , )


filter.

❏ Rotate tires.




, ( , )


❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-r





❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; repl

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your ve

off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading

Repair Order # Dea


78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or


A

I

N






( )


filter.

❏ Rotate tires.




( )


filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the

following: Dusty or off-road conditions.



❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if

necessary.




8

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service 96,000 M

MAIN







❏ Rotate tires.




❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,






filter.

❏ Rotate tir

❏ If using y

following

Inspect th

replace if

❏ Inspect th

necessary

❏ Inspect th

❏ Inspect e

❏ Inspect th

and boot

Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or 108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 114,000


A

I

N

T







filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the ignition cables (4.7L

Engine).

❏ Replace the side row of spark plugs

(4.7L Engine).

❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if

not done at 60 months.





filter.

❏ Rotate tires.






necessary.




towing.




114 MonService ❏ Change t

filter.

❏ Rotate tir

Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

8

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule

MAIN






❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.


❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).



❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.



❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).

❏ Change the transfer case fluid.

❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).




126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or

M h M i

132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or

M h M i

138,000

M


A

I

N

T







filter.

❏ Rotate tires.




towing.





filter.

❏ Rotate tires.






necessary.





filter.

❏ Rotate tir

Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

8

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service

S h d l

150,000

150 M

MAIN







❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the



❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,




❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.





filter.

❏ Rotate tir

❏ Replace

❏ Replace

(4.7L En

❏ Replace

5.7L Eng

❏ Adjust pa

equipped

❏ Inspect th

Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturerto the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions

Chrysler LLC recommends thvals be performed at your sell


A

I

N

T






to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissionswarranty.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only that service work for whichyou have the knowledge and the right equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to perform aservice job, take your vehicle to a competent me-chanic.

Maintenance Schedule — Diesel EngineTo help you have the best driving experience possible,

the manufacturer has identified the specific vehicle main-tenance service intervals that are required to keep yourvehicle operating properly and safely.

vals be performed at your sellat your dealership know yoaccess to factory trained inforparts, and specially designedtools that can help prevent fu

The maintenance intervals shas indicated in this section.

NOTE: Under no circumstatervals exceed 12,500 miles (whichever comes first.

At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level

fully warmed engine is shuwhile the vehicle is on leveaccuracy of the oil level rethe level is at or below the

8

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.

• Inspect for the presence owater separator unit.

MAIN






required.

Once a Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear ordamage.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminalsas required.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brakemaster cylinder, and power steering and add asneeded.

• Check all lights and other electrical items for correctoperation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

water separator unit.

CAUTI

Failure to perform the requmay result in damage to the

Required Maintenance InteRefer to the Maintenance Scpages for the required mainte

6,250 Miles (10,000 km) or

6 Months Maintenance Service


Schedule

478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESMA

I

N

T






6 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Rotate tires.





❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty

the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.


❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,5012 months.

❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,500

12 months.

Odometer Reading

Repair Order # Dea


8

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

18,750 Miles (30,000 km) or

18 Months Maintenance


Schedule

MAIN






18 Months MaintenanceService Schedule❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.

Change if using your vehicle for police,

taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer

towing.





❏ Rotate tires.


❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, repl

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect exhaust system.



❏ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-whe

Odometer Reading

Repair Order # Dea


31,250 Miles (50,000 km) or


37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or


43,750 M

42 Mont


I

N

T






30 Months MaintenanceService Schedule❏ Rotate tires.





filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of

the following: Dusty or off-road

conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, replace if necessary.


necessary.




towing.




42 MontService ❏ Rotate tir

Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

8

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S


Schedule

56,250 M

54 Mont

MAIN







❏ Rotate tires.



❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.




❏ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.





❏ Inspect th

Change i

taxi, flee

towing.

Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au


Schedule

68,750 M

66 Mont


I

N

T







❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect

the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.


❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of thefollowing: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Change the transfer case if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,

off-road, or frequent trailer towing.





Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

8

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S


Schedule

81,250 M

78 Mont

MAIN







❏ Rotate tires.




❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,

off-road, or frequent trailer towing.









Odometer Re

Repair Order

Signature Au

87,500 Miles (140,000 km) or


93,750 Miles (150,000 km) or



I

N

T

E






Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of

the following: Dusty or off-roadconditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, replace if necessary.


necessary.




Service Schedule❏ Rotate tires.




towing.




8

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S


Schedule

MAIN






❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.







❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.

❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant (antifreeze).

❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).





WARNING!

Y b b dl i j d ki d


I

N

T

E






You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Do only that service work for whichyou have the knowledge and the right equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-chanic.

8

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTA






CONTENTS

Ⅵ Suggestions For Obtaining Service For YourVehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 489

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Ⅵ If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 490▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 490

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

▫ Customer Assistance ForSpeech Impaired (TDD/T

▫ Service Contract . . . . .

Ⅵ Warranty Information (U.S

Ⅵ MOPAR Parts . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Reporting Safety Defects

▫ In The 50 United States AD.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . .

Ⅵ Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Ⅵ Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire

▫ Traction Grades . . . . .

▫ Temperature Grades . .

488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE






p pQuality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

p

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FORYOUR VEHICLE

the service advisor and list thAt many authorized dealersvehicle at a minimal daily cha

IF YOU NEED CO






Prepare For The Appointment

If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have theright papers with you. Take your warranty folder. Allwork to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the servicemanager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’sservice history. This can often provide a clue to thecurrent problem.

Prepare A ListMake a written list of your vehicle’s problems or thespecific work you want done. If you’ve had an accidentor work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With RequestsIf you list a number of items and you must have yourvehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

vehicle at a minimal daily chais advisable to make these arrfor an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its autinterested in your satisfactionwith our products and service

Warranty service must be donWe strongly recommend thatauthorized dealer. They knowand are most concerned thatquality service. The manufac

have the facilities, factory-trtools, and the latest informatifixed correctly and in a timely

This is why you should always talk to an authorizeddealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-solved with this process

• Vehicle delivery date and m

Chrysler LLC Customer Ce







solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to thegeneral manager or owner of the authorized dealer-ship. They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve theconcern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customercenter.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealership name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

P.O. Box 21–8004Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004Phone: (800) 992-1997

Chrysler Canada Inc. Cust

P.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone: (800) 465–2001

In Mexico contact:

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Sante Fe C.P. 05109Mexico, D. F.In Mexico City: 5081-7568Outside Mexico City: 1-800-50

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or SpeechImpaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the

have any questions about themanufacturer’s Service Contraline at 1-800-521-9922

IF YOU NEED CO






To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, themanufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customercenter. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, whohas access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with themanufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicleto help protect you from the high cost of unexpectedrepairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind onlythe manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased amanufacturer’s service contract, you will receive PlanProvisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mailwithin three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

line at 1 800 521 9922.

The manufacturer will not contract that is not the manufais not responsible for any serv

manufacturer’s service contravice contract that is not a manuand you require service afterVehicle Limited Warranty excontract documents, and conthose documents.

We appreciate that you havewhen you purchased the veh

has also made a major investmtraining to assure that you are

the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with theirsincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or relatedconcerns.

MOPAR PARTSMopar fluids, lubricants, pavailable from an authorized d







concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain

vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-cals known to the State of California to cause cancerand birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms andprovisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicableto this vehicle.

available from an authorized dthe vehicle operating at its be

REPORTING SAFETY DEF

In The 50 United States AnIf you believe that your vehicause a crash or cause injuimmediately inform the NatioAdministration (NHTSA) in manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar coinvestigation, and if it finds th

a group of vehicles, it may ocampaign. However, NHTSA individual problems betweedealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-

PUBLICATION ORDER FORTo order the following manuawebsite or the phone number

IF YOU NEED CO






or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In CanadaIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, youshould contact the Customer Service Department imme-diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safetydefect to the Canadian government should write to:Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigationsand Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B3V9.

website or the phone numbertercard, American Express, ancepted. If you prefer mailing for an order form.

NOTE: A street address ismanuals (no P.O. Boxes).

• Service Manuals

These comprehensive Servinformation that students aneed in diagnosing/troublemaintaining, servicing, anvehicles. A complete workhicle, system, and/or costraightforward language wand charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-h t d d t il d ill t ti Th ti

Call toll free at:

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)







grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-cal manuals make it easy for students and techniciansto find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to

find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all toolsand equipment.

• Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with theassistance of service and engineering specialists toacquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-ties and safety tips.

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide We

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSP

TIRE QUALITY GRADESThe following tire grading catethe National Highway Traffic specific grade rating assignedin each category is shown on

your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must requirements in addition to th

TreadwearThe Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

WARN

The traction grade assigned

IF YOU NEED CO






conditions on a specified government test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, and differences in road charac-teristics and climate.

Traction GradesThe Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop onwet pavement, as measured under controlled conditionson specified government test surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

g gstraight-ahead braking tracinclude acceleration, cornepeak traction characteristics

Temperature GradesThe temperature grades are representing the tire’s resistanand its ability to dissipate controlled conditions on a sptest wheel. Sustained high tematerial of the tire to degeneraexcessive temperature can lead

grade C corresponds to a levepassenger car tires must mee

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory testwheel, than the minimum required by law.







q y

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-ing, either separately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX






ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)Anti-Lock Brake System (ABSAnti-Lock Warning Light . .

498 INDEX






Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 417Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,71,186Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,187Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Anti-Theft System . . . . . . .Appearance Care . . . . . . . .Arming Theft System (SecuritAssist, Hill Start . . . . . . . .

Assistance Towing . . . . . . . Auto Down Power WindowsAutomatic Dimming MirrorAutomatic Door Locks . . . . Automatic Headlights . . . .Automatic Temperature ContrAutomatic Transmission . . .

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . .

Fluid and Filter Changes .Fluid Level Check . . . . . Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . .Special Additives . . . . . .

Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 163

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Light . . . . . . . .

Brake/Transmission Interlock






Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,70Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,312Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Break-In Recommendations, NBulb Replacement . . . . . . . .Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration, Compass . . . . . Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . .Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . .Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Power Steering . . . . . . . .Radiator (Coolant Pressure)

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . .

Carbon Monoxide Warning .Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . .Cargo Area Features . . . . . . Cargo Compartment . . . . . .

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167C d l

Climate Control . . . . . . . . .Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold Weather Operation . . .C (C )

500 INDEX






Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,260

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Check Engine Light(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59,64,66Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Compact Disc (CD) MaintenaCompact Spare Tire . . . . . . Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Compass Calibration . . . . .

Compass Variance . . . . . . .Computer, Trip/Travel . . . .Connector

UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Consumer Interf

Console, Overhead . . . . . . .Contract, Service . . . . . . . .Cooling System . . . . . . . . .

Adding Coolant (AntifreezeCoolant Capacity . . . . . . Coolant Level . . . . . . . . .Disposal of Used Coolant

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429P C 427

DipsticksAutomatic Transmission .Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . .P S i






Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 425,456

Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,263,269

Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Power Steering . . . . . . . .Disabled Vehicle Towing . . .Disarming, Theft System . . Disposal

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . .Used Engine Fluids . . . .

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Locks, Automatic . . . Door Opener, Garage . . . . . Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . .Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . .

DVD Player (Video Entertainm

E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Remote Mirrors . . .

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 163Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312B k A i t S t 313

Emission Control System MaiEngine

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .Bl k H t

502 INDEX






Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 144Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 192Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,193Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Block Heater . . . . . . . . .Break-In RecommendationsCompartment . . . . . . . . .Compartment Identification

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Gas Caution . . . .Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . .Flooded, Starting . . . . . . Fuel Requirements . . . . .Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Oil Change Interval . . . .Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . .

Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . .Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . .

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

E i Oil Vi it 416

Hazard Warning . . . . . . .Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . .

Flexible Fuel VehiclesC i i R






Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 54Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,359,422Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,422Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

FiltersAir Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Cruising Range . . . . . . .Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . .Fuel Requirements . . . . .Replacement Parts . . . . .

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . Flooded Engine Starting . . .Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . .Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission .Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . .Power Steering . . . . . . . .Fluids, Lubricants and GenuinFog Light Service . . . . . . . .

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,192,453Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Operation 296

Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Caution . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

504 INDEX






Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,356Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Garage Door Opener (HomeLGas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . .

Gasoline, Reformulated . . .Gasoline/Oxygenate BlendsGauges

Coolant Temperature . . .Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Speedometer . . . . . . . . .Tachometer . . . . . . . . . .

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . .

General Information . . . . . .Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . .Gross Axle Weight Rating . .

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,369GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Hands Free Phone (uconnect) 82

HitchesTrailer Towing . . . . . . . .

Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . .HomeLink (Garage Door Op






Hands-Free Phone (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,450Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,120Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 137Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

HomeLink (Garage Door OpHood Release . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Key Removal . . . . Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . Inflation Pressure Tires . . . .Information Center, Vehicle .Inside Rearview Mirror . . .

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . .Instrument Panel and ControInstrument Panel Lens CleaniIntegrated Power Module (Fu

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Interior Lights 134 137

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . LATCH (Lower Anchors and CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Latches

506 INDEX






Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,137Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 140Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,394 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . Liftgate Window Wiper/WashLight Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . .Automatic Headlights . . .

Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Saver . . . . . . . . .Brake Assist Warning . . .Brake Warning . . . . . . . .

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Cruise 191

Instrument Cluster . . . . .Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lights On Reminder . . . .Low Fuel






Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,137Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 325

Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 192Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,192,453Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450,451Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator (CheMap Reading . . . . . . . . .Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear Servicing . . . . . . . .Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . Security Alarm (Theft AlarmService . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Engine Soon (Malfu

Side Marker . . . . . . . . . .SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . .Tire Pressure Monitoring (TTow/Haul Indicator . . . .

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,130,136,452,454Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Maintenance Procedures . . .Maintenance Schedule . . . .Malfunction Indicator Light (Manual, Service . . . . . . . . .

508 INDEX






Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . .Memory Feature (Memory SeMemory Seat . . . . . . . . . . .Memory Seats and Radio . .

Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Dimming . . . . Electric Powered . . . . . . Electric Remote . . . . . . . Exterior Folding . . . . . . . Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifications/Alterations, VeMonitor, Tire Pressure System

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,492Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . .Identification Logo . . . . . Materials Added to . . . . . Recommendation . . . . . .






New Vehicle Break In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,356

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,191Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . 302,436Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . 302,436Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Recommendation . . . . . .Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .

Onboard Diagnostic System .

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLOperator Manual (Owner’s MOutside Rearview Mirrors . Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overdrive OFF Switch . . . .Overhead Console . . . . . . .Overheating, Engine . . . . . .Owner’s Manual (Operator M

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . .Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .

Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pregnant Women and Seat BePreparation for Jacking . . . .

510 INDEX






, jPersonal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 331Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437Power

Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 163Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,307

p J gPretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Electronic Feat

Programming Transmitters(Remote Keyless Entry) . . .

Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . .Radio Operation . . . . . . . .Radio, Satellite (uconnect gps

Rain Sensitive Wiper SystemRear Axle (Differential) . . . .Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . .Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . .

Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Remote Sound System (RadioRemote Starting System . . . Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . .Replacement Keys . . . . . . .






Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 383Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 385

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Remote ControlStarting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

p yReplacement Parts . . . . . . .Replacement Tires . . . . . . .Reporting Safety Defects . . .

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . Restraints, Occupant . . . . . Retractable Cargo Area CoverRocking Vehicle When StuckRoll Over Warning . . . . . . Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Checks Inside VehicleSafety Checks Outside VehicleSafety Defects, Reporting . .Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . .

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Satellite Radio (uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . . . 252,257

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . .Head Restraints . . . . . . .Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

512 INDEX






( )Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462,476Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,70

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 41And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,66Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Lumbar Support . . . . . . .Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . .Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . .

Security Against Theft . . . . Security Alarm (Theft Alarm)Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . .Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . Sentry Key Programming . . Sentry Key Replacement . . Service Assistance . . . . . . .Service Contract . . . . . . . . .Service Engine Soon Light(Malfunction Indicator) . . . .

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,223,227,236Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Automatic Transmission .Cold Weather . . . . . . . . .Engine Block Heater . . . .Engine Fails to Start . . . .






Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,136,185,452,454Sirius Backseat TV™ (uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . 257SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,339,392Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,280

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . .Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering Wheel Mounted SouSystem Controls . . . . . . . . .Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Storage, Behind the Seat . . .Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Compartment, CenterStorage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . .Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sun Visor Extension . . . . . .

Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 46Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . .Tire Safety Information . . . .Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . .

514 INDEX






System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 264Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 189Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 331Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact Spare . . . . . . . .

General Information . . . .High Speed . . . . . . . . . .Inflation Pressures . . . . .

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . .Load Capacity . . . . . . . .Pressure Monitor System (TPressure Warning Light . .Quality Grading . . . . . . .Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Replacement . . . . . . . . .Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . .Cooling System Tips . . . .Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Requirements .






Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,401

24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Trailer and Tongue WeightWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . .

Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . .Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance . . . . . . . . .Transmission

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .Maintenance . . . . . . . . .Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmitter Battery Service(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . Transmitter, Garage Door OpTransmitter Programming(Remote Keyless Entry) . . .

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,185,452,454

UCI C 247

Video Entertainment System™(Rear Seat Video System) . .Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . Voice Recognition System (VR

516 INDEX






UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444,447

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 247Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,367Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,448

Warning Flasher, Hazard . .Warning, Roll Over . . . . . .

Warnings and Cautions . . . Warranty Information . . . . . Washers, Windshield . . . . .Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . .Waxing and Polishing . . . . . Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . .Wheel and Wheel Trim CareWheel Mounting . . . . . . . .Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . .Window Fogging . . . . . . . .Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,263,269Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . .Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . .






INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into thisvehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radiof l b l d d l h

The antenna cable should brouted away from the vehicle

l f ll h ld d l






frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephoneequipment must be installed properly by trained person-nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directlyto the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.The negative power connection should be made to bodysheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on theroof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets mayaffect the accuracy or operation of the compass onvehicles so equipped.

only fully shielded coaxial ca

Carefully match the antenn

ensure a low Standing WaveMobile radio equipment withnormal may require special p

All installations should be chence between the communivehicle’s electronic systems.






Chrysler LLC

81-326-0954 Second Edition

Documents

2009-GrandCherokee-2nd